ABB Relion RES670 Technical Manual Download Page 685 | Manualshive

Page: 685 / 934

background image

Name

Function

block

SPA

address

Description

Sub Enable

SXSWI21

3 I 569

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI22

3 I 588

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI23

3 I 607

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI24

3 I 626

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI25

3 I 645

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI26

3 I 664

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI27

3 I 683

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI28

3 I 702

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Update Block

SXCBR01

2 I 7853

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR02

2 I 7864

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR03

2 I 7883

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR04

2 I 7905

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR05

2 I 7922

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR06

2 I 7943

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR07

2 I 7960

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR08

2 I 7981

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR09

3 I 6

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR10

3 I 27

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR11

3 I 44

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR12

3 I 57

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR13

3 I 73

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR14

3 I 92

SPA parameter for update block

command

Table continues on next page

1MRK 511 408-UUS A

Section 19

Station communication

Phasor measurement unit RES670 2.2 ANSI

679

Technical manual

«
...
683
684
685
686
687
...
»

Summary of Contents for Relion RES670

Page 1: ...RELION 670 SERIES Phasor measurement unit RES670 Version 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...Document ID 1MRK 511 408 UUS Issued October 2017 Revision A Product version 2 2 1 Copyright 2017 ABB All rights reserved ...

Page 4: ...erms of such license This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written developed by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com and Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Trademarks ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be...

Page 5: ...product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons including but not limited to personal injuries or death shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be compl...

Page 6: ...rning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits Low voltage directive 2006 95 EC This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255 26 for the EMC directive and with the product standards EN 60255 1 and EN 60255 27 for the low voltage directive The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC ...

Page 7: ...asurement functions 47 Back up protection functions 48 Control and monitoring functions 49 Communication 53 Basic IED functions 55 Section 3 Analog inputs 57 Introduction 57 Function block 57 Signals 58 Settings 61 Monitored data 68 Operation principle 69 Technical data 71 Section 4 Binary input and output modules 73 Binary input 73 Binary input debounce filter 73 Oscillation filter 73 Settings 73...

Page 8: ...ngs 80 Operation principle 81 Local HMI 81 Keypad 82 Display 84 LEDs 88 LED configuration alternatives 89 Functionality 89 Status LEDs 89 Indication LEDs 90 Function keys 100 Functionality 100 Operation principle 100 Section 6 Wide area measurement system 103 C37 118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol Configuration PMUCONF 103 Identification 103 Functionality 103 Operation principle 103 IE...

Page 9: ...5 Signals 146 Settings 146 Operation principle 148 Resistive reach in forward direction 149 Resistive reach in reverse direction 150 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction 150 Basic detection logic 151 Operating and inhibit conditions 153 Technical data 154 Out of step protection OOSPPAM 78 154 Identification 154 Functionality 154 Function block 155 Signals 155 Settings 156 Monitored data...

Page 10: ... quantity within the function 199 Internal polarizing 200 External polarizing for ground fault function 202 Directional detection for ground fault function 202 Base quantities within the protection 202 Internal ground fault protection structure 203 Four residual overcurrent steps 203 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function 205 Second harmonic blocking elemen...

Page 11: ...ction SDEPSDE 67N 228 Identification 228 Functionality 229 Function block 231 Signals 231 Settings 232 Monitored data 234 Operation principle 234 Function inputs 234 Technical data 242 Thermal overload protection one time constant Fahrenheit Celsius LFPTTR LCPTTR 26 243 Identification 243 Functionality 243 Function block 244 Signals 244 Settings 245 Monitored data 247 Operation principle 247 Techn...

Page 12: ...step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27 271 Identification 271 Functionality 271 Function block 272 Signals 272 Settings 273 Monitored data 275 Operation principle 276 Measurement principle 276 Time delay 277 Blocking 282 Design 283 Technical data 285 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59 285 Identification 285 Functionality OV2PTOV 286 Function block 286 Signals 286 Settings 288 Monitored da...

Page 13: ... Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81 308 Identification 308 Functionality 308 Function block 309 Signals 309 Settings 310 Operation principle 310 Measurement principle 310 Time delay 311 Blocking 311 Design 311 Technical data 312 Rate of change of frequency protection SAPFRC 81 312 Identification 313 Functionality 313 Function block 313 Signals 313 Settings 314 Operation principle 314 Measurement p...

Page 14: ...uantities for CVGAPC function 339 Built in overcurrent protection steps 339 Built in undercurrent protection steps 344 Built in overvoltage protection steps 345 Built in undervoltage protection steps 345 Logic diagram 345 Technical data 351 Section 12 System protection and control 355 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC 355 Identification 355 Functionality 355 Function block 355 Signals 355 Settings 356 ...

Page 15: ...377 Technical data 380 Section 14 Control 381 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC 381 Identification 381 Functionality 381 Function block 382 Signals 382 Settings 384 Monitored data 384 Operation principle 384 Graphical display 385 Selector mini switch VSGAPC 386 Identification 386 Functionality 387 Function block 387 Signals 387 Settings 388 Operation princip...

Page 16: ...ock 395 Signals 395 Settings 396 Operation principle 397 Single command 16 signals SINGLECMD 397 Identification 397 Functionality 397 Function block 398 Signals 398 Settings 399 Operation principle 399 Section 15 Logic 401 Tripping logic SMPPTRC 94 401 Identification 401 Functionality 401 Function block 402 Signals 402 Settings 403 Operation principle 404 Logic diagram 408 Technical data 410 Gener...

Page 17: ... Operation principle 425 Technical data 425 Logic for group warning WRNCALH 425 Identification 425 Functionality 426 Function block 426 Signals 426 Settings 427 Operation principle 427 Technical data 428 Logic for group indication INDCALH 428 Identification 428 Functionality 428 Function block 428 Signals 429 Settings 429 Operation principle 430 Technical data 430 Basic configurable logic blocks 4...

Page 18: ...se timer function block PULSETIMER 437 Function block 437 Signals 437 Settings 437 Technical data 438 Reset set with memory function block RSMEMORY 438 Function block 438 Signals 438 Settings 439 Technical data 439 Set reset with memory function block SRMEMORY 439 Function block 440 Signals 440 Settings 440 Technical data 440 Settable timer function block TIMERSET 441 Function block 441 Signals 44...

Page 19: ...data 448 Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT 448 Function block 449 Signals 449 Technical data 450 Inverter function block INVERTERQT 450 Function block 451 Signals 451 Technical data 451 ORQT function block 451 Function block 452 Signals 452 Technical data 452 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT 453 Function block 453 Signals 453 Settings 454 Technical data 454 Reset Set function block RSM...

Page 20: ...nction block 461 Signals 461 Settings 461 Operation principle 462 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I 462 Identification 462 Functionality 462 Function block 463 Signals 463 Monitored data 464 Settings 464 Operation principle 464 Technical data 465 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation 16 bit BTIGAPC 465 Identification 465 Functionality 466 Function block 466 Signals 466...

Page 21: ... time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC 475 Identification 475 Functionality 475 Function block 476 Signals 477 Settings 477 Operation principle 477 Operation accuracy 479 Memory storage 479 Technical data 479 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP 480 Identification 480 Functionality 480 Function block 480 Signals 480 Settings 481 Monitored data 481 Operation pri...

Page 22: ...e neutral voltage measurements VMMXU VNMMXU 522 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI CMSQI 522 Technical data 522 Gas medium supervision SSIMG 63 524 Identification 524 Functionality 525 Function block 525 Signals 525 Settings 526 Monitored data 527 Operation principle 527 Technical data 528 Liquid medium supervision SSIML 71 528 Identification 528 Functionality 529 Function block 529 S...

Page 23: ...g 544 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication 545 Technical data 546 Event function EVENT 547 Identification 547 Functionality 547 Function block 547 Signals 548 Settings 549 Operation principle 551 Disturbance report DRPRDRE 552 Identification 552 Functionality 553 Function block 553 Signals 555 Settings 557 Monitored data 567 Operation principle 571 Technical data 579 Logical signal status repor...

Page 24: ...a 589 Running hour meter TEILGAPC 589 Identification 589 Functionality 589 Function block 590 Signals 591 Settings 591 Operation principle 591 Operation accuracy 593 Memory storage 593 Technical data 594 Section 17 Metering 595 Pulse counter logic PCFCNT 595 Identification 595 Functionality 595 Function block 595 Signals 596 Settings 596 Monitored data 597 Operation principle 597 Technical data 59...

Page 25: ...t communication 614 Identification 614 Functionality 614 Operation principle 614 Merging unit 616 Introduction 616 Settings 617 Monitored data 617 Routes 623 Introduction 623 Settings 623 Monitored data 624 Section 19 Station communication 625 Communication protocols 625 Communication protocol diagnostics 625 DNP3 protocol 626 IEC 61850 8 1 communication protocol 626 Functionality 626 Communicatio...

Page 26: ...GOOSEDPRCV 634 Identification 634 Functionality 634 Function block 634 Signals 634 Settings 635 Operation principle 635 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV 636 Identification 636 Functionality 636 Function block 636 Signals 636 Settings 637 Operation principle 637 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV 638 Identification 638 Functionality 638 Function...

Page 27: ... principle 651 IEC UCA 61850 9 2LE communication protocol 652 Introduction 652 Function block 652 Signals 652 Output signals 652 Settings 653 Monitored data 654 Operation principle 659 Technical data 663 LON communication protocol 664 Functionality 664 Settings 664 Operation principle 665 IEC 60870 5 103 communication protocol 684 Introduction 684 Measurands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103MEAS 685 Functi...

Page 28: ...ck 691 Signals 691 Settings 691 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870 5 103 I103FLTPROT 691 Functionality 691 Identification 692 Function block 692 Signals 693 Settings 694 IED status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103IED 694 Functionality 694 Identification 694 Function block 694 Signals 695 Settings 695 Supervison status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103SUPERV 695 Functionality 695 Identification 695 Func...

Page 29: ...03 I103USRCMD 702 Functionality 702 Identification 702 Function block 702 Signals 702 Settings 703 Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 I103GENCMD 703 Functionality 703 Identification 704 Function block 704 Signals 704 Settings 705 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 I103POSCMD 705 Functionality 705 Identification 706 Function block 706 Signals 706 Settings 706 IED c...

Page 30: ... ACTIVLOG 724 Activity logging ACTIVLOG 724 Settings 725 Section 20 Remote communication 727 Binary signal transfer 727 Identification 727 Functionality 727 Signals 728 Settings 732 Monitored data 736 Operation principle 738 Transmission of local analog data via LDCM to remote end function block LDCMTRN called LDCMTransmit 739 Identification 739 Function block 740 Signals 740 Section 21 Security 7...

Page 31: ...th internal event list INTERRSIG 752 Functionality 752 Function block 752 Signals 753 Settings 753 Operation principle 753 Internal signals 755 Supervision of analog inputs 757 Technical data 757 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK 758 Functionality 758 Function block 758 Signals 758 Operation principle 758 Denial of service DOS 759 Functionality 759 Operation principle 759 Section 22 Basic IED functions ...

Page 32: ...ED identifiers TERMINALID 779 Functionality 779 Settings 779 Product information PRODINF 780 Functionality 780 Settings 780 Factory defined settings 780 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI 781 Functionality 781 Function block 782 Signals 782 Operation principle 783 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO 783 Functionality 783 Function block 783 Signals 784 Operation principle 784 Signal matrix for ...

Page 33: ...ification 795 Functionality 795 Settings 796 Section 23 IED hardware 797 Overview 797 Variants of case size with local HMI display 797 Case from the rear side 799 Hardware modules 804 Overview 804 Numeric module NUM 805 Introduction 805 Functionality 805 Technical data 806 Power supply module PSM 807 Introduction 807 Design 807 Technical data 807 Local human machine interface Local HMI 808 Transfo...

Page 34: ...826 Static binary output module SOM 827 Introduction 827 Design 827 Signals 828 Settings 829 Monitored data 829 Technical data 831 Binary input output module IOM 833 Introduction 833 Design 833 Signals 834 Settings 835 Monitored data 835 Technical data 837 mA input module MIM 840 Introduction 840 Design 840 Signals 842 Settings 842 Monitored data 844 Technical data 844 Galvanic RS485 communication...

Page 35: ... Dimensions 853 Case with rear cover 853 Case without rear cover 855 Flush mounting dimensions 857 Side by side flush mounting dimensions 858 Wall mounting dimensions 859 Mounting alternatives 860 Flush mounting 860 Overview 860 Mounting procedure for flush mounting 861 19 panel rack mounting 861 Overview 861 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting 863 Wall mounting 864 Overview 864 Mounting...

Page 36: ...0 Electrical safety 870 Connection system 871 Influencing factors 871 Type tests according to standard 872 Section 24 Labels 875 Labels on IED 875 Section 25 Connection diagrams 877 Section 26 Inverse time characteristics 879 Application 879 Principle of operation 882 Mode of operation 882 Inverse characteristics 888 Section 27 Glossary 917 Table of contents 30 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 A...

Page 37: ... rated CT inputs 2 Main current transformer with 5 A secondary rating are wired to the IED 5 A rated CT inputs 3 CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with the associated main instrument transformers Note that for functions which measure an analogue signal which do not have corresponding primary quantity the 1 1 ratio shall be set for the used analogue inputs on the IED Example of such...

Page 38: ...ted otherwise 1 2 Intended audience GUID C9B8127F 5748 4BEA 9E4F CC762FE28A3A v11 This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel who use technical data during engineering installation and commissioning and in normal service The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems protection equipment protection functions and the configured funct...

Page 39: ... instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the various tools available within the PCM600 software The manual provides instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 DNP3 LON and ...

Page 40: ... manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions and lists function blocks logic diagrams input and output signals setting parameters and technical data sorted per function The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase installation and commissioning phase and during normal service The communic...

Page 41: ...ual IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 393 UEN Point list manual DNP3 1MRK 511 397 UUS Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012 BUS Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003 BEN Test system COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001 BEN 1 4 Document symbols and conventions 1 4 1 Symbols GUID 2945B229 DAB0 4F15 8A0E B9CF0C2C7B15 v12 The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electri...

Page 42: ...personal injury or death It is important that the user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices 1 4 2 Document conventions GUID 96DFAB1A 98FE 4B26 8E90 F7CEB14B1AB6 v6 Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary The glossary also contains definitions of important terms Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push butto...

Page 43: ... another diagram have the suffix cont Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters If it is not specifically mentioned then the dimension is in millimeters Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products than the one the manual describes The example that is illustrated is still valid 1 5 IEC 61850 edition 1 edition 2 mapping GUID C5133366 7260 4C47 A975 7DBAB3A33A96 v4...

Page 44: ...12 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F13 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F14 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F15 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F16 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F17 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F18 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F19 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F20 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F21 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F22 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F23 BFPTRC BFPTRC BFPTRC_F24 BFPTRC BFPTRC BICPTRC_01 BICPTRC BICPTRC BICPTRC_02 BICPTRC BICPTRC BICPTRC_03 BICPTRC BICPTRC BI...

Page 45: ... BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BBTPLLN0 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUT...

Page 46: ...ZNTGAPC BZNTPDIF CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU CBPPTRC HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV PH3PTUC PH3PTOC RP3PDOP CBPMMXU CBPPTRC HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC PH3PTUC RP3PDOP CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV COUVPTUV COUVPTOV COUVPTUV CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN GF2PHAR GF2PTOV GF2PTUC...

Page 47: ...IOC EFPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC SDDSPVC GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC GENPDIF GENPHAR GENPTRC GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP PH1PTRC GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP PH1PTRC HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH I...

Page 48: ...LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LD0LLN0 LLN0 LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPTRC LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LOLSPTR LOLSPTR LOLSPTR LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LPHD LPHD LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC LT3CPDIF LT3CPHAR LT3CPTRC LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC LT6CP...

Page 49: ...2PTOV PH1PTRC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC GEN4PHAR PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPTRC QCBAY QCBAY BAY LLN0 QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPTRC ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC...

Page 50: ... SPGGIO SPGAPC SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG SSIML SSIML SSIML STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS STBPTOC STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC T2WPDIF T2WPHAR T2WPTRC T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC T3WPDIF T3WPHAR T3WPTRC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCSLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC ...

Page 51: ...SGAPC WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS ...

Page 52: ...IS ZMMAPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC Section 1 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Introduction 46 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 53: ...9 16 0 2 PHASORREPO RT3 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37 118 phasors 17 24 0 2 PHASORREPO RT4 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37 118 phasors 25 32 0 2 ANALOGREPO RT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37 118 analogs 1 8 0 2 ANALOGREPO RT2 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37 118 analogs 9 16 0 2 ANALOGREPO RT3 Protoco...

Page 54: ...tection one time constant Celsius 0 6 LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection one time constant Fahrenheit 0 6 GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0 4 GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0 4 Voltage protection UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0 4 OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0 4 Frequency protection SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0 6 SAPTOF 81 Overfrequ...

Page 55: ...CMD Single command 16 signals 4 I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870 5 103 1 I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 50 I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 50 I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC 60870 5 103 50 I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870 5 103 1 I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 60870 5 103 4 Secondary...

Page 56: ...ixed signal function block 1 B16I Boolean to integer conversion 16 bit 18 BTIGAPC Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation 16 bit 16 IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node representation 16 TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision 12 INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 30 REA...

Page 57: ...PQT 20 INDEXTSPQT 20 INVALIDQT 22 INVERTERQT 120 ORQT 120 PULSETIMERQT 40 RSMEMORYQT 40 SRMEMORYQT 40 TIMERSETQT 40 XORQT 40 Table 4 Total number of instances for extended logic package Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances AND 180 GATE 49 INV 180 LLD 49 OR 180 PULSETIMER 89 RSMEMORY 40 SLGAPC 74 SRMEMORY 130 TIMERSET 109 VSGAPC 120 XOR 89 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 2 Availab...

Page 58: ...ured value expander block 66 SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for gas medium 21 SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for liquid medium 3 SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 0 18 I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870 5 103 1 I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870 5 103 3 I103AR Function status auto recloser for IEC 60870 5 103 1 I103EF Function status earth fault for IEC 60870 5 103...

Page 59: ... IP and EIA 485 communication protocol 1 IEC 61850 8 1 IEC 61850 1 GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59 GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64 GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32 GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60 GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block t...

Page 60: ...rnet port 6 RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant Ethernet ports 3 DHCP DHCP configuration for front access point 1 QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96 Remote communication BinSignRec1_1 BinSignRec1_2 BinSignReceive2 Binary signal transfer receive 3 3 6 BinSignTrans1_1 BinSignTrans1_2 BinSignTransm2 Binary signal transfer transmit 3 3 6 BinSigRec1_12M BinSigRec1_22M BinSigTran1_12M BinSi...

Page 61: ...setting groups TESTMODE Test mode functionality CHNGLCK Change lock function SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs SMAI1 SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase ATHSTAT Authority status ATHCHCK Authority check AUTHMAN Authority management FTPACCS FTP access with password GBASVAL Global base values f...

Page 62: ...r FNKEYTY1 FNKEYTY5 FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600 LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys GRP1_LED1 GRP1_LED15 GRP2_LED1 GRP2_LED15 GRP3_LED1 GRP3_LED15 Basic part for CP HW LED indication module Section 2 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Available functions 56 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 63: ...acilitate service values reading This analog channel s phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and remaining analog channel s phase angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary eq...

Page 64: ...Analog current input 9 CH10 I STRING Analog current input 10 CH11 I STRING Analog current input 11 CH12 I STRING Analog current input 12 PID 3921 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 8 TRM_6I_6U Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status CH1 I STRING Analogue current input 1 CH2 I STRING Analog current input 2 CH3 I STRING Analog current input 3 CH4 I STRING Analog current in...

Page 65: ...ut 6 PID 3923 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 10 TRM_7I_5U Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status CH1 I STRING Analogue current input 1 CH2 I STRING Analog current input 2 CH3 I STRING Analog current input 3 CH4 I STRING Analog current input 4 CH5 I STRING Analog current input 5 CH6 I STRING Analog current input 6 CH7 I STRING Analog current input 7 CH8 V STRING Anal...

Page 66: ...e input 11 CH12 V STRING Analog voltage input 12 PID 6598 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 12 TRM_10I_2U Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status CH1 I STRING Analogue current input 1 CH2 I STRING Analog current input 2 CH3 I STRING Analog current input 3 CH4 I STRING Analog current input 4 CH5 I STRING Analog current input 5 CH6 I STRING Analog current input 6 CH7 I ST...

Page 67: ...IA MU2 IB MU2 IC MU2 I0 MU2 VA MU2 VB MU2 VC MU2 V0 MU3 IA MU3 IB MU3 IC MU3 I0 MU3 VB MU2 VB MU3 VC MU3 V0 MU4 L1I L4I MU4 L1U L4U MU5 L1I L4I MU5 L1U L4U MU6 L1I L4I MU7 L1I L4I MU7 L1U L4U MU8 L1I L4I MU8 L1U L4U MU9 L1I L4I MU9 L1U L4U MU10 L1I L4I MU10 L1U L4U MU11 L1I L4I MU11 L1U L4U MU12 L1I L4I MU12 L1U L4U TRM40 Ch1 Reference channel for phase angle presentation 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Sectio...

Page 68: ...s protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec5 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim5 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec6 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim6 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint7 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protecte...

Page 69: ...rotected object FromObject the opposite CTsec2 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim2 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint3 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec3 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim3 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint4 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected o...

Page 70: ...0 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim1 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint2 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec2 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim2 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint3 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec3 1 10 A 1 1 Ra...

Page 71: ...A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim5 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec6 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim6 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint7 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec7 1 10 A 1 1 Rate...

Page 72: ...object FromObject the opposite CTsec5 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim5 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec6 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim6 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint7 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object Fro...

Page 73: ...d CT secondary current CTprim3 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint4 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec4 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim4 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint5 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec5 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secon...

Page 74: ...0 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec12 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim12 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage 3 5 Monitored data PID 6531 MONITOREDDATA v3 Table 20 AISVBAS Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description Status INTEGER 0 Ok 1 Error 2 AngRefLow 3 Uncorrelated Service value status PID 3920 MONITOREDDATA v6 Table 21 ...

Page 75: ... BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Analog input module status 3 6 Operation principle SEMOD55028 5 v9 The direction of a measured current depends on the connection of the CT The main CTs are typically star WYE connected and can be connected with the Star WYE point towards the object or away from the object This information must be set in the IED Once the CT direction settings is correctly entered the internal ...

Page 76: ...2 EN US Figure 2 Internal convention of the directionality in the IED If the settings of the primary CT is correct that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject according to the plant condition then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected object and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object The settings of the IED is performed in primary values The ratios of ...

Page 77: ...T test switch is included Voltage inputs Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V Operating range 0 340 V Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s 420 V continuously Burden 20 mVA at 110 V 80 mVA at 220 V all values for individual voltage inputs Note All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency Table 28 TRM Energizing quantities rated values and limits for measuring transformer Descrip...

Page 78: ... V continuously Burden 20 mVA at 110 V 80 mVA at 220 V all values for individual voltage inputs Note All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency SEMOD53376 2 v6 Table 29 CT and VT circuit connectors Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area Screw compression type 250 V AC 20 A 4 mm2 AWG12 2 x 2 5 mm2 2 x AWG14 Terminal blocks suitable for ring ...

Page 79: ...when the signal goes down to 0 again 4 1 2 Oscillation filter GUID 41B89E6F 50C3 44BF 9171 3CC82EB5CA15 v4 Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from for example nearby breakers An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state cha...

Page 80: ...illation release limit 4 1 3 2 Setting parameters for binary input output module PID 4050 SETTINGS v2 Table 31 IOMIN Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Binary input output module in operation On or not Off DebounceTime 0 001 0 020 s 0 001 0 001 Debounce time for binary inputs OscBlock 1 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit OscR...

Page 81: ...meout 1 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout ContrastLevel 100 100 10 0 Contrast level for display DefaultScreen 0 Default screen EvListSrtOrder Latest on top Oldest on top Latest on top Sort order of event list AutoIndicationDRP Disabled Enabled Disabled Automatic indication of disturbance report SubstIndSLD No Yes No Substitute indication on single line diagram InterlockIndSLD No Yes No Interl...

Page 82: ...e 33 LHMICTRL Input signals Name Type Default Description RSTLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to reset the LCD HMI LEDs PID 3992 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 34 LHMICTRL Output signals Name Type Description HMI ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active RED S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD HMI is steady YELLOW S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD HMI is steady YELLOW F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD HMI is flashing RS...

Page 83: ... RESET NEWIND ACK IEC09000321 1 en vsd IEC09000321 V1 EN US Figure 4 LEDGEN function block GRP1_LED1 HM1L01R HM1L01Y HM1L01G IEC09000322 V1 EN US Figure 5 GRP1_LED1 function block The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example The 15 LEDs in each of the three groups have a similar function block 5 3 3 Signals PID 4114 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 35 LEDGEN Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BO...

Page 84: ...on Disabled Enabled tRestart 0 0 100 0 s 0 1 0 0 Defines the disturbance length t_MaxTripDelay 0 1 100 0 s 0 1 1 0 Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance PID 1697 SETTINGS v18 Table 39 GRP1_LED1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SequenceType Follow S Follow F LatchedAck F S LatchedAck S F LatchedColl S LatchedReset S Follow S Sequence type for LED 1...

Page 85: ...D1 LEDCTL1 FKEYOUT1 IEC09000327 V1 EN US Figure 6 FNKEYMD1 function block Only the function block for the first button is shown above There is a similar block for every function key button 5 4 3 Signals PID 1657 INPUTSIGNALS v18 Table 40 FNKEYMD1 Input signals Name Type Default Description LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key PID 1657 OUTPUTSIGNALS v19 Table 41 FNKEYMD1 Output sign...

Page 86: ...8 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state PID 6452 SETTINGS v2 Table 43 FNKEYTY1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type Disabled Menu shortcut Control Disabled Function key type MenuShortcut 0 Menu shortcut for function key GUID BCE87D54 C836 40EE 8DA7 779B767059AB v1 MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on the product mai...

Page 87: ...NSI13000239 2 en vsd ANSI13000239 V2 EN US Figure 7 Local human machine interface The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 81 Technical manual ...

Page 88: ...avigate in different views or menus The push buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms reset indications provide help and switch between local and remote control mode The keypad also contains programmable push buttons that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons Section 5 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 82 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technic...

Page 89: ...control navigation and command push buttons and RJ 45 communication port 1 5 Function button 6 Close 7 Open 8 Escape 9 Left 10 Down 11 Up 12 Right 13 Key 14 Enter 15 Remote Local 16 Uplink LED 17 Not in use 18 Multipage 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 83 Technical manual ...

Page 90: ...4112 B5C7 217AAF360EA5 v11 The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display LCD with a resolution of 320 x 240 pixels The character size can vary The display view is divided into four basic areas Section 5 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 84 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 91: ...ontent The status area shows the current IED time the user that is currently logged in and the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600 If text pictures or other items do not fit in the display a vertical scroll bar appears on the right The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the display horizontally Truncation is indicated w...

Page 92: ...nce The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function buttons Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the function button control action The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600 Section 5 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 86 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manua...

Page 93: ...B B979 FD4A971475E3 V1 EN US Figure 12 Indication LED panel The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time Each panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display Both panels have a dynamic width that depends on the label string length 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machi...

Page 94: ...I or PCM600 Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button Pressing that button cycles through the three pages A lit or un acknowledged LED is indicated with a highlight Such lines can be selected by using the Up Down arrow buttons Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop ups as well as fro...

Page 95: ...four as latch type Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection indication system either in collecting or restarting mode with reset functionality The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality 5 5 2 2 Status LEDs GUID 4822DF9C E343 442B B3F1 3FA8CD8DF234 v4 There are three status LEDs above the LCD in f...

Page 96: ...nd green are connected to different sources of events for the same function block collecting mode shows the highest priority LED color that was activated since the latest acknowledgment was made If a number of different indications were made since the latest acknowledgment it is not possible to get a clear view of what triggered the latest event without looking at the sequence of events list A con...

Page 97: ...ed for LED indications defined for re starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 LatchedReset S When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light Operating sequence GUID DFCA880B 308C 4334 94DF 97C7765E8C13 v5 The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched For the Follow type the LED follows the input signal completely Fo...

Page 98: ...000311 vsd IEC09000311 V1 EN US Figure 14 Symbols used in the sequence diagrams Sequence 1 Follow S SEMOD56072 39 v4 This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light It does not react on acknowledgment or reset Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation Activating signal LED IEC01000228_2_en vsd IEC01000228 V2 EN US Figure 15 Operating Sequenc...

Page 99: ...esent any more If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light Activating signal LED Acknow en01000231 vsd IEC01000231 V1 EN US Figure 17 Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck F S GUID CC607709 5344 4C88 AA97 6395FD335E55 v5 The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block is used for all three colour LEDs When an acknowledgment is performed all indication...

Page 100: ...ions with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications which are not visible according to figure 19 Activating signal RED LED Acknow IEC09000314 1 en vsd Activating signal YELLOW G Y R R Y Activating signal GREEN IEC09000314 V1 EN US Figure 19 Operating sequence 3 three colors involved alternative 1 GUID 071B9EB5 A1D2 49C5 9458 4D21B7E068BE v3 If an indication with higher priorit...

Page 101: ...e to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation IEC01000235_2_en vsd Activating signal LED Reset IEC01000235 V2 EN US Figure 21 Operating Sequence 5 Latche...

Page 102: ... S Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset that is immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences Timing diagram for sequence 6 SEMOD56072 86 v4 Figure 23 show...

Page 103: ...rt IEC01000239 V2 EN US Figure 23 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two indications within same disturbance Figure 24 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 97 Technical manual ...

Page 104: ... IEC01000240 V2 EN US Figure 24 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two different disturbances Figure 25 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed Section 5 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 98 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 105: ...EC01000241 V2 EN US Figure 25 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for manual reset 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 99 Technical manual ...

Page 106: ...n configuration When used as a menu shortcut a function button provides a fast way to navigate between default nodes in the menu tree When used as a control the button can control a binary signal 5 5 3 2 Operation principle GUID 977C3829 B19B 457E 8A4D 45317226EF22 v3 Each output on the FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI function keys By pressing a function button on...

Page 107: ... time the function key has been pressed for more than 500ms Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below Input value Output value IEC09000331_1_en vsd 500ms 500ms 500ms IEC09000331 V2 EN US Figure 28 Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE Setting PULSED In this mode the output sets high 1 when the function...

Page 108: ... v2 All function keys work the same way When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function button is of type CONTROL then the corresponding input on this function block becomes active and will light the yellow function button LED when high This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off It has been implemented this way for safety reasons the idea is that...

Page 109: ...ttings and parameters in order to establish and define a number of TCP and or UDP connections with one or more PDC clients synchrophasor client This includes port numbers TCP UDP IP addresses and specific settings for IEEE C37 118 as well as IEEE 1344 protocols 6 1 3 Operation principle GUID 2608FBC4 9036 476A 942B 13452019BC11 v2 The Figure 30 demonstrates the communication configuration diagram ...

Page 110: ...18 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast PMU ID PMU ID IEC140000117 1 en vsd IEC140000117 V2 EN US Figure 30 The communication configuration PMUCONF structure in the IED 6 1 3 1 IEEE C37 118 Message Framework GUID B8CC9D53 1CC5 43CC 9AF0 9B4D8CDC1922 v...

Page 111: ...EEE C37 118 data for TCP clients As can be seen there are two separate parameters in the IED for selecting port numbers for TCP connections one for IEEE1344 protocol 1344TCPport and another one for C37 118 protocol C37 118 TCPport Client can communicate with the IED over IEEE1344 protocol using the selected TCP port defined in 1344TCPport and can communicate with the IED over IEEE C37 118 protocol...

Page 112: ... 3 3 Short guidance for use of UDP GUID F5BCBBF7 4EED 4E79 9E86 AF046D201BB1 v3 The IED supports maximum of 6 concurrent UDP streams They can be individually configured to send IEEE1344 or C37 118 data frames as unicast multicast Note that x at the end of each parameter is referring to the UDP stream number UDP client group and is a number between 1 and 6 Each of the 6 UDP groups in the IED has th...

Page 113: ...me UDP group UDP client group x As shown in Figure 30 there are maximum 2 instances of PMUREPORT function blocks available in the IED Each UDP client group x can only connect to one of the PMUREPORT instances at the same time This is defined in the PMU by the parameter PMUReportUDP x which is used to define the instance number of PMUREPORT function block that must send data on this UDP stream UDP ...

Page 114: ...TTINGS v4 Table 44 PMUCONF Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description 1344TCPport 1024 65534 1 4711 TCP port for control of IEEE 1344 data for TCP clients C37 118TCPport 1024 65534 1 4712 TCP port for control of IEEE C37 118 data for TCP clients TCPportUDPdataCtrl1 1024 65534 1 4713 TCP port for control of data sent over UDP client group1 SendDataUDP1 Disabled Enabled...

Page 115: ...tination port for UDP client group3 SendCfgOnUDP3 Disabled Enabled Disabled Send Config frame2 on UDP for group3 TCPportUDPdataCtrl4 1024 65534 1 4716 TCP port for control of data sent over UDP client group4 SendDataUDP4 Disabled Enabled SetByProtocol Disabled Send data to UDP client group4 ProtocolOnUDP4 IEEE1344 C37 118 C37 118 Select protocol for UDP client group4 PMUReportUDP4 1 2 1 1 PMUREPOR...

Page 116: ...nation port for UDP client group6 SendCfgOnUDP6 Disabled Enabled Disabled Send Config frame2 on UDP for group6 6 2 Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37 118 PMUREPORT GUID 0C45D2FA 1B95 4FCA B23B A28C2770B817 v1 6 2 1 Identification GUID 0090956B 48F1 4E8B 9A40 90044C71DF20 v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Protocol reporting...

Page 117: ...PMU reporting function blocks includes PMUREPORT PHASORREPORT1 4 ANALOGREPORT1 3 and BINARYREPORT1 3 function blocks In general each instance of PMU functionality has 32 configurable phasor channels PHASORREPORT1 4 blocks 24 analog channels ANALOGREPORT1 3 blocks and 28 digital channels 24 digital report channels in BINARYREPORT1 3 and 4 trigger report channels in PMUREPORT function block Special ...

Page 118: ...h instance there are three separate ANALOGREPORT blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Analog signals 8 Analog signals in each ANALOGREPORT block These can include for example transfer of active and reactive power or reporting the milliampere input signals to the PDC clients as defined in IEEE C37 118 data frame format IEC140000120 2 en vsd IEC140000120 V2 EN US Figure 33 Multiple instances of ANAL...

Page 119: ...PORT blocks 6 2 3 Function block GUID 45150D7E 3231 4661 A8B4 17364AF25035 v2 PMUREPORT BLOCK FREQTRIG DFDTTRIG MAGHIGHTRIG MAGLOWTRIG TIMESTAT ANSI14000301 vsd ANSI14000301 V1 EN US ANALOGREPORT1 ANALOG1 ANALOG2 ANALOG3 ANALOG4 ANALOG5 ANALOG6 ANALOG7 ANALOG8 ANSI14000302 vsd ANSI14000302 V1 EN US ANSI14000303 vsd ANALOGREPORT2 ANALOG9 ANALOG10 ANALOG11 ANALOG12 ANALOG13 ANALOG14 ANALOG15 ANALOG1...

Page 120: ...ARYREPORT2 BINARY9 BINARY10 BINARY11 BINARY12 BINARY13 BINARY14 BINARY15 BINARY16 ANSI14000306 V1 EN US ANSI14000307 vsd BINARYREPORT3 BINARY17 BINARY18 BINARY19 BINARY20 BINARY21 BINARY22 BINARY23 BINARY24 ANSI14000307 V1 EN US ANSI14000308 vsd PHASORREPORT1 PHASOR1 PHASOR2 PHASOR3 PHASOR4 PHASOR5 PHASOR6 PHASOR7 PHASOR8 ANSI14000308 V1 EN US Section 6 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Wide area measurement sys...

Page 121: ...4 Signals SEMOD55830 1 v2 PID 6244 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 45 PMUREPORT Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals FREQTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Frequency trigger DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Rate of change of frequency trigger MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Magnitude high trigger MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Magnitude low trigger PID 6244 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 46 PMUREPORT Output signals Name T...

Page 122: ...G11 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 11 ANALOG12 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 12 ANALOG13 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 13 ANALOG14 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 14 ANALOG15 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 15 ANALOG16 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 16 PID 6240 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 49 ANALOGREPORT3 Input signals Name Type Default Description ANALOG17 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 17 ANALOG18 REAL 0 0 A...

Page 123: ...Y11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 11 BINARY12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 12 BINARY13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 13 BINARY14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 14 BINARY15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 15 BINARY16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 16 PID 6243 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 52 BINARYREPORT3 Input signals Name Type Default Description BINARY17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 17 BINARY18 BOO...

Page 124: ...NAL Group signal Input for Phasor8 PID 6253 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 54 PHASORREPORT2 Input signals Name Type Default Description PHASOR9 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor9 PHASOR10 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor10 PHASOR11 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor11 PHASOR12 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor12 PHASOR13 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor13 PHASO...

Page 125: ...UP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor24 PID 6255 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 56 PHASORREPORT4 Input signals Name Type Default Description PHASOR25 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor25 PHASOR26 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor26 PHASOR27 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor27 PHASOR28 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor28 PHASOR29 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phaso...

Page 126: ... float Select phasor datatype FrequencyDataType float Integer float Select frequency datatype AnalogDataType float Integer float Select analog data type SendFreqInfo Disabled Enabled Enabled Send frequency and rate of change of frequency information ReportRate 10 10 fr s 60 50Hz 12 10 fr s 60 50Hz 15 10 fr s 60 50Hz 20 25 fr s 60 50Hz 30 25 fr s 60 50Hz 60 50 fr s 60 50Hz 120 100 fr s 60 50Hz 240 ...

Page 127: ...e RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 3 Analog4Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 4 in integer format Analog4UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 4 Analog5Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 5 in integer format Analog5UnitTy...

Page 128: ...ange for scaling analog 9 in integer format Analog9UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 9 Analog10Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 10 in integer format Analog10UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 10 Analog11Range 3277 0...

Page 129: ...mat Analog14UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 14 Analog15Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 15 in integer format Analog15UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 15 Analog16Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for sc...

Page 130: ... RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 19 Analog20Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 20 in integer format Analog20UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 20 Analog21Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 21 in integer format Analog2...

Page 131: ...og input Unit type for analog 24 PID 6252 SETTINGS v2 Table 61 PHASORREPORT1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description phasor2 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor2 Phasor3 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor3 Phasor4 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor4 Phasor5 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSS...

Page 132: ...automatic frequency source selection Phasor4Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 4 Phasor4UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 4 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor5Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 5 Phasor5UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 5 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor6Rport Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporti...

Page 133: ...ription Phasor9 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor9 Phasor10 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor10 Phasor11 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor 11 Phasor12 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor12 Phasor13 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor13 Phasor14 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A ...

Page 134: ...sabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 12 Phasor12UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 12 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor13Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 13 Phasor13UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 13 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor14Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 14 Phasor14UseFreqSrc Disabled Ena...

Page 135: ...NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor20 Phasor21 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor21 Phasor22 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor22 Phasor23 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor23 Phasor24 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor24 Phasor17Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor...

Page 136: ...utomatic frequency source selection Phasor21Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 21 Phasor21UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 21 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor22Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 22 Phasor22UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 22 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor23Report Disabled Enabled Enable...

Page 137: ...NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor28 Phasor29 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor29 Phasor30 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor30 Phasor31 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor31 Phasor32 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor32 Phasor25Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor...

Page 138: ...c frequency source selection Phasor30Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 30 Phasor30UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 30 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor31Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 31 Phasor32Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 32 Phasor31UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 31 for automatic frequency so...

Page 139: ...log input channel 3 ANALOG4 REAL Analog input channel 4 ANALOG5 REAL Analog input channel 5 ANALOG6 REAL Analog input channel 6 ANALOG7 REAL Analog input channel 7 ANALOG8 REAL Analog input channel 8 PID 6239 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 67 ANALOGREPORT2 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description ANALOG9 REAL Analog input channel 9 ANALOG10 REAL Analog input channel 10 ANALOG11 REAL Analog i...

Page 140: ...el 2 BINARY3 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 3 BINARY4 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 4 BINARY5 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 5 BINARY6 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 6 BINARY7 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 7 BINARY8 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 8 PID 6242 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 70 BINARYREPORT2 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description BINARY9 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 9 BINARY10 BOOLEAN B...

Page 141: ...onitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PHASOR1 REAL Phasor 1 amplitude PHASOR1 REAL deg Phasor 1 angle PHASOR2 REAL Phasor 2 amplitude PHASOR2 REAL deg Phasor 2 angle PHASOR3 REAL Phasor 3 amplitude PHASOR3 REAL deg Phasor 3 angle PHASOR4 REAL phasor 4 amplitude PHASOR4 REAL deg Phasor 4 angle PHASOR5 REAL Phasor 5 amplitude PHASOR5 REAL deg Phasor 5 angle PHASOR6 REAL Phasor 6 ampl...

Page 142: ...5 angle PHASOR16 REAL Phasor 16 amplitude PHASOR16 REAL deg Phasor 16 angle PID 6254 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 74 PHASORREPORT3 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PHASOR17 REAL Phasor 17 amplitude PHASOR17 REAL deg Phasor 17 angle PHASOR18 REAL Phasor 18 amplitude PHASOR18 REAL deg Phasor 18 angle PHASOR19 REAL Phasor 19 amplitude PHASOR19 REAL deg Phasor 19 angle PHASOR20 REAL Ph...

Page 143: ...litude PHASOR31 REAL deg Phasor 31 angle PHASOR32 REAL Phasor 32 amplitude PHASOR32 REAL deg Phasor 32 angle 6 2 7 Operation principle GUID EB2B9096 2F9D 4264 B2D2 8D9DC65697E8 v3 The Phasor Measurement Unit PMU features three main functional principles To measure the power system related AC quantities voltage current and to calculate the phasor representation of these quantities To synchronize th...

Page 144: ...racy of the measurements The IEEE C37 118 standard also imposes a variety of steady state and dynamic requirements which are fulfilled in the IED with the help of high accuracy measurements and advanced filtering techniques Figure 35 shows an overview of the PMU functionality and operation In this figure only one instance of PMUREPORT PMUREPORT1 is shown Note that connection of different signals t...

Page 145: ...r block is used to provide the required information for each respective PMUREPORT phasor channel More information about preprocessor block is available in the section Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI 6 2 7 1 Frequency reporting GUID 4F3BA7C7 8C9B 4266 9F72 AFB139E9DC21 v2 By using patented algorithm the IED can track the power system frequency in quite wide range from 9 Hz to 95 Hz In order to...

Page 146: ...ith a lower channel number is prioritized to the one with a higher channel number As a result the first voltage phasor is always the one delivering the system frequency to the PDC client and if by any reason this voltage gets disconnected then the next available voltage phasor is automatically used as the frequency source and so on If the first voltage phasor comes back since it has a higher prior...

Page 147: ...or internal processing For this purpose there is an anti aliasing filter designed for each reporting rate The correct anti aliasing filter will be automatically selected based on the reporting rate and the performance class P M settings The filters are designed to attenuate all aliasing frequencies to at least 40 dB a gain of 0 01 at M class The synchrophasor measurement is adaptive as it follows ...

Page 148: ...factors conversion factor for analog channels are defined in configuration frame 2 CFG 2 and configuration frame 3 CFG 3 frames as follows CFG 2 frame The field ANUNIT 4 bytes specifies the conversion factor as a signed 24 bit word for user defined scaling Since it is a 24 bit integer in order to support the floating point scale factor the scale factor itself is multiplied in 10 so that a minimum ...

Page 149: ... US The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2 and 0 15 on configuration frame 3 The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is 0 15 to 4915 5 and 0 15 to 4915 5 Example 3 10000000000 AnalogXRange IECEQUATION2450 V1 EN US The scale factor is calculated as follows 10000000000 2 0 305180 43 and 0 0 65535 5 scalefactor offset IECEQUATION2451 V1 EN US The scale fac...

Page 150: ...re for the signal magnitude current steady state test mentioned in Table 3 of IEEE C37 118 1 2011 standard the compliancy to the standard is limited to the current range between 50 and 200 of rated current for both P and M classes of the standard The reason is that protection cores are not designed for accurate measurements on low current levels The compliancy to IEEE C37 118 1 2011 standard inclu...

Page 151: ...neration plants Power swing detection function ZMRPSB 68 is used to detect power swings and initiate block of all distance protection zones Occurrence of ground fault currents during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB 68 function to allow fault clearance 7 1 3 Function block M13884 3 v5 ANSI06000264 2 en vsd ZMRPSB 68 I3P V3P BLOCK BLK_SS BLK_I0 BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXT_PSD PICK...

Page 152: ...to inhibit power swing detection output TRSP BOOLEAN 0 Single pole tripping command issued by tripping function EXT_PSD BOOLEAN 0 Input for external detection of power swing PID 3663 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 78 ZMRPSB 68 Output signals Name Type Description PICKUP BOOLEAN Power swing detected ZOUT BOOLEAN Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary ZIN BOOLEAN Measured impedance within inner ...

Page 153: ...d boundary reverse tGF 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 3 000 Timer for overcoming single pole reclosing dead time IMinPUPG 5 30 IB 1 10 Minimum operate current in of IBase Table 80 ZMRPSB 68 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description tP1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 045 Timer for detection of initial power swing tP2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 015 Timer for detection of subsequent power swi...

Page 154: ...pedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately One out of three or two out of three operating modes can be selected according to the specific system operating conditions R jX LdAngle LdAngle RLdOutFw RLdInFw R1FInFw R1FInRv RLdInRv RLdOutRv X1InFw X1OutFw ZL R1LIn X1InRv X1OutRv ANSI05000175 2 en vsd DFw j j j DRv DRv DRv DRv DRv DFw DFw DFw DFw DFw ANSI05...

Page 155: ...load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first quadrant same LdAngle and RLdOutFw and calculated value RLdInFw The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation to the distance measuring zones The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resist...

Page 156: ...ndary The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv R1FInRv The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn The angle of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant The distance between the inner and outer boun...

Page 157: ...pedance measuring elements in each phase separately n represents the corresponding A B and C They are internal signals calculated by ZMRPSB 68 function The tP1 timer in figure 38 serve as detection of initial power swings which are usually not as fast as the later swings are The tP2 timer become activated for the detection of the consecutive swings if the measured impedance exit the operate area a...

Page 158: ...0 AND BLK_SS BLOCK INHIBIT ZOUT_C ZOUT_B ZOUT_A DET1of3 int REL1PH BLK1PH AND DET2of3 int REL2PH BLK2PH AND EXT_PSD AND PICKUP ZOUT ZIN_A ZIN_B ZIN_C ZIN AND OR AND AND OR OR OR OR OR loop loop 0 0 tGF 10ms 0 0 tH 0 0 0 tR2 0 tR1 0 ANSI05000114 V2 EN US Figure 40 Simplified block diagram for ZMRPSB 68 function Section 7 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Impedance protection 152 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2...

Page 159: ... is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLK_SS functional input The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay set on tR1 timer if an ground fault appears during the power swing input IOCHECK is high and the power swing has been detected before the ground fault activation of the signal I0CHECK...

Page 160: ...2 Functionality GUID BF2F7D4C F579 4EBD 9AFC 7C03296BD5D4 v8 The out of step protection OOSPPAM 78 function in the IED can be used for both generator protection and as well for line protection applications The main purpose of the OOSPPAM 78 function is to detect evaluate and take the required action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system The OOSPPAM 78 function detects pole slip cond...

Page 161: ...M 78 I3P1 I3P2 V3P BLOCK BLKGEN BLKMOT EXTZ1 TRIP TRIPZ1 TRIPZ2 PICKUP GENMODE MOTMODE R X SLIPFREQ ROTORANG VCOSPHI ANSI14000055 1 en vsd ANSI12000188 V2 EN US Figure 41 OOSPPAM 78 function block 7 2 4 Signals PID 3539 INPUTSIGNALS v10 Table 83 OOSPPAM 78 Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P1 GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for three phase current input 1 I3P2 GROUP SIGNAL Group connecti...

Page 162: ...IPFREQ REAL Slip frequency in Hz ROTORANG REAL Rotor angle as estimated by the out of step function VCOSPHI REAL Estimated Ucos Phi voltage during pole slip in V 7 2 5 Settings PID 3539 SETTINGS v10 Table 85 OOSPPAM 78 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled OperationZ1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation Zo...

Page 163: ... for Z2 in of VBase sqrt 3 IBase ForwardX 0 00 1000 00 ZB 0 01 10 00 Imag part of total forward impedance for Z2 in of VBase sqrt 3 IBase ReverseR 0 00 1000 00 ZB 0 01 1 00 Real part of source impedance behind relay in of VBase sqrt 3 IBase ReverseX 0 00 1000 00 ZB 0 01 10 00 Imag part of source impedance behind relay in of VBase sqrt 3 IBase InvertCTCurr No Yes No Invert current direction Table 8...

Page 164: ...and stable conditions a generator operates with a constant rotor angle power angle delivering active electrical power to the power system which is approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis The currents and voltages are constant and stable An out of step condition is characterized by periodic changes in the rotor angle that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing pow...

Page 165: ...erator accelerated and when the fault was finally cleared the complex impedance Z R X jumped to the point 2 By that time the generator has already lost its step Z R X continues its way from the right hand side to the left hand side and the 1st pole slip cannot be avoided If the generator is not immediately disconnected it will continue pole slipping see Figure 42 where two pole slips two pole slip...

Page 166: ...gure 42 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 Time in millis econds Impe dance Z in Ohm and rotor a ngle in radian Z in Ohms angle in rad normal load fault 500 ms Z R X cros s ed the impedance line Z line connecting points SE RE fault occurrs Z R X under fault lies on the impedance line or near for 3 ph faults Under 3 phas e fault condition rotor angle of app 180 degrees is meas ured ...

Page 167: ... point 0 or near 7 2 7 1 Lens characteristic GUID F9BD3225 C87F 4FA6 A267 2248F0A4E707 v6 A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that the power system in which OOSPPAM 78 is installed is modeled as a two machine equivalent system or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system Then the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM 78 in the directio...

Page 168: ...or a power system ANSI10000113 1 en vsd d Y Generator 13 8 kV 13 8 kV Power line 220 kV Infinite power system Out Of Step protection OOSPPAM 13 8 220 kV REG ForwardZ ForwardR ForwardX ReverseR Rg ForwardR Rtr Rline Req ReverseX Xd ForwardX Xtr Xline Xeq All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13 8 kV SE RE Generator 13 8 kV 13 8 kV Power line 220 kV Infinite power system Transform...

Page 169: ...le the length of the Z line depends on the values of ForwardX ReverseX ForwardR and ReverseR the width of the lens is a function of the setting PickupAngle The lens is broader for smaller values of the PickupAngle and becomes a circle for PickupAngle 90 degrees When the complex impedance Z R X enters the lens pole slipping is imminent and a pickup signal is issued The angle recommended to form the...

Page 170: ...p function and are of great help with eventual investigations of the performance of the out of step function 7 2 7 3 Maximum slip frequency GUID 1311529F 21F8 40A0 8D01 0296BD9B4F00 v5 A pole slip may be detected if it has a slip frequency lower than a maximum value fsMax The specific value of fsMax depends on the setting parameter PickupAngle which determines the width of the lens characteristic ...

Page 171: ...urrents flowing under out of step conditions can be even greater that those for a three phase short circuit on generator terminals see Figure 48 The currents flowing are highest at rotor angle 180 degrees and smallest at 0 degrees where relatively small currents flow To open the circuit breaker at 180 degrees when not only the currents are highest but the two internal that is induced voltages at b...

Page 172: ...en the trip command is given If specified tBreaker 0 for example tBreaker 0 040 second then automatically the TripAngle is ignored and the second more exact method applied 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 4 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 Real part R of Z in Ohms Imaginary part X of Z in Ohms R Ohm no trip region loci of Z R X no trip region rotor angle 180 X Ohm RE Receiving End infinite bus this circle is loci...

Page 173: ...r quantities that can as well be read as outputs are only calculated if the Z R X enters the limit of reach zone which is a circle in the complex R X plane When the complex impedance Z R X enters the limit of reach region the algorithm determines in which direction the impedance Z moves that is the direction the lens is traversed measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the ot...

Page 174: ... Z R X within limit of reach X NO Return YES Z R X within lens characteristic NO YES Z R X entered lens from Function alert RIGHT LEFT Z R X exited lens on the left hand side NO YES YES pole slip Was traverse time more than 50 ms Motor losing step Generator losing step NO X R Calculation of positive sequence active power P reactive power Q rotor angle ROTORANG and UCOSPHI P Q ROTORANG 1 Number of ...

Page 175: ...ction four steps OC4PTOC 51 67 has independent inverse time delay settings for steps 1 to 4 All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user defined time characteristic The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory The function can be set to be directional or non directional independently for each of the steps A second harmo...

Page 176: ...TRST2_B TRST2_C TRST3_A TRST3_B TRST3_C TRST4_A TRST4_B TRST4_C PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST2 PU_ST3 PU_ST4 PU_A PU_B PU_C PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C PU_ST3_A PU_ST3_B PU_ST3_C PU_ST4_A PU_ST4_B PU_ST4_C PU2NDHARM DIR_A DIR_B DIR_C STDIRCND ANSI06000187 V4 EN US Figure 50 OC4PTOC 51_67 function block Section 8 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Current protection 170 Phasor measurement unit RES6...

Page 177: ...N 0 When activated the pickup multiplier is in use for step4 PID 6973 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 92 OC4PTOC 51_67 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1 TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2 TRST3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3 TRST4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4 TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A TR_B BOOLEAN Trip sig...

Page 178: ...EAN Pickup signal from step1 phase A PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase B PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase C PU_ST2_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase A PU_ST2_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase B PU_ST2_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase C PU_ST3_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step3 phase A PU_ST3_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step3 phase B PU_ST3_C BOOL...

Page 179: ...EC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 Pickup1 5 2500 IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1 in of IBase t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse char of step 1 TD1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 I...

Page 180: ... 2 IMin2 1 10000 IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in of IBase t2Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 MultPU2 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2 DirModeSel3 Disabled Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 3 Disabled Nondir Forward Reverse Characterist3 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv ANS...

Page 181: ...erist4 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv ANSI Norm inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 4 Pickup4 5 2500 IB 1 175 Operating phase current level for step 4 in of IBase t4 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 2 000 Def time delay or add ...

Page 182: ...0 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 tPRCrv1 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 tTRCrv1 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 tCRCrv1 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 HarmBlock1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable block of step 1 for harmonic ...

Page 183: ...0 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Constant reset time for step 3 tPCrv3 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 tACrv3 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 tBCrv3 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 tCCrv3 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3 tPRCrv3 0...

Page 184: ...er programmable curve for step 4 tCRCrv4 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4 HarmBlock4 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain Table 95 OC4PTOC 51_67 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description MeasType DFT RMS DFT Selection between DFT and RMS measurement GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of t...

Page 185: ...is step 1 2 3 and 4 an operation mode is set by DirModeSelx Disable Non directional Forward Reverse The protection design can be divided into four parts The direction element The harmonic restraint blocking function The four step overcurrent function The mode selection If VT inputs are not available or not connected setting parameter DirModeSelx shall be left to default value Non directional 1MRK ...

Page 186: ...RMS value of the fundamental frequency component of each phase current is derived The influence of the DC current component and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed If the RMS option is selected then the true RMS value is used The true RMS value includes the contribution from the current DC component as well as from the higher current harmonic in addition to the fund...

Page 187: ...ose in faults causing a low measured voltage the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage 85 and a memory voltage 15 The following combinations are used Phase phase short circuit _ _ ref AB A B dir AB A B V V V I I I GUID 4F361BC7 6D91 47B5 8119 A27009C0AD6A V1 EN US Equation 8 _ _ ref BC B C dir BC B C V V V I I I ANSIEQUATION1450 V1 EN US Equation 9 _ _ ref CA C A dir CA C A...

Page 188: ...d current IBase the condition seals in If the fault has caused tripping the trip endures If the fault was detected in the reverse direction the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation If the current decreases below the minimum operating value the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10 of its rated value The directional setting is given as a characteris...

Page 189: ...ective phases if their current amplitudes are higher than the pickup level PUMinOpPhSel and the direction of the current is according to the set direction of the step If no blocking signals are active the pickup signal will start the timer of the steps The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or an inverse time delay characteristic A wide range of standardized inv...

Page 190: ...erse AND AND FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int OR OR STAGEx_DIR_Int ANSI12000008 3 en vsd AND AND Characteristx Inverse Inverse ANSI12000008 3 en vsd 0 0 tx 0 0 txMin PUx ANSI12000008 V3 EN US Figure 53 Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC Section 8 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Current protection 184 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 191: ...s the operation value needs to be changed for example due to changed network switching state The operation current value Ix is limited to be between Ix Max and Ix Min The default values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for Ix and the limits can only be used for reducing the allowed range of Ix This feature is used when remote setting of the operation current value is allowed making...

Page 192: ...t 10 1024 Forward direction detected in phase L3 bit 11 2048 Reverse direction detected in phase L3 All four steps in OC4PTOC 51 67 can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK The binary input BLKx x 1 2 3 or 4 blocks the operation of the respective step The pickup signals from the function can be blocked by the binary input BLK The trip signals from the function can be blocked by the binary input ...

Page 193: ... lBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Relay characteristic angle RCA 40 0 65 0 degrees 2 0 degrees Relay operating angle ROA 40 0 89 0 degrees 2 0 degrees Second harmonic blocking 5 100 of fundamental 2 0 of In Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset step 1 4 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Minimum trip time for inverse curves step 1 4 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is ...

Page 194: ... overcurrent protection four steps EF4PTOC 51N 67N can be used as main protection for phase to ground faults It can also be used to provide a system back up for example in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure EF4PTOC 51N 67N has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step All IEC and ANSI time delayed ch...

Page 195: ...T4 PUSOTF PUFW PUREV 2NDHARMD ANSI06000424 V5 EN US Figure 57 EF4PTOC 51N 67N function block 8 2 4 Signals IP11453 1 v2 PID 6967 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 99 EF4PTOC 51N_67N Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for operate current V3P GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for polarizing voltage I3PPOL GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for polarizing current I3PDIR GROUP SI...

Page 196: ...me Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2 TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3 TRST4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4 TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from switch onto fault function PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal PUST1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 1 PUST2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 2 PUST3 BOOLEAN Pickup signal st...

Page 197: ... of 2nd harmonic curr in of fundamental curr BlkParTransf Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable blocking at energizing of parallel transformers Use_PUValue ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 ST4 Current pickup blocking at parallel transf step1 2 3 or 4 SOTF Disabled SOTF UnderTime SOTF UnderTime Disabled SOTF operation mode Off SOTF Undertime SOTF Undertime SOTFSel Open Closed CloseCommand Open Select signal to activate ...

Page 198: ...0 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse char of step 1 TD1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time characteristic IMin1 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 100 00 Minimum operate residual current for step 1 in of IBase t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 1 MultPU1 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting...

Page 199: ...2 TD2 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected time characteristic IMin2 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 50 Minimum operate residual current for step 2 in of IBase t2Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 2 MultPU2 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value for step 2 HarmBlock2 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable blo...

Page 200: ...3 TD3 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected time characteristic IMin3 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 33 Minimum operate residual current for step 3 in of IBase t3Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 3 MultPU3 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value for step 3 HarmBlock3 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable blo...

Page 201: ... MultPU4 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value for step 4 HarmBlock4 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable block of step 4 for harmonic restraint Table 102 EF4PTOC 51N_67N Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description IN1 Min 1 2500 IB 1 1 Minimum used operate residual current level for step 1 in of IBase if IN1 is less than IN1 Min then IN1 is set ...

Page 202: ... for step 2 tPCrv2 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tACrv2 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tBCrv2 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tCCrv2 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tPRCrv2 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Param P...

Page 203: ...2500 Maximum used operate residual current level for step 4 in of IBase if IN4 is greater than IN4 Max then IN4 is set to IN4 Max ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4 Instantaneous IEC ANSI tReset4 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Reset time delay for step 4 tPCrv4 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve for step 4 tACrv...

Page 204: ...gle 8 2 7 Operation principle IP12992 1 v2 M13941 51 v7 This function has the following four analog inputs on its function block in the configuration tool 1 I3P input used for the operating quantity Supplies the zero sequence magnitude measuring functionality 2 V3P input used for the voltage polarizing quantity Supplies either the zero or the negative sequence voltage to the directional functional...

Page 205: ...ssing block connected to EF4PTOC 51N 67N function Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600 In such a case the pre processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre processing block by using the following formula will take 3I0 from SMAI AI3P and will be connected to I3PDIR and I3P inputs If the zero sequence current is selected op I 3...

Page 206: ...7N analog function input V3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600 In such a case the pre processing block will calculate 3V0 from the first three inputs into the pre processing block by using the following formula VPol 3V0 VA VB VC EQUATION2012 V1 EN US Equation 16 where VA VB VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages In order to use this all ...

Page 207: ...m three phase current input within the IED when the fourth analog input into the pre processing block connected to EF4PTOC 51N 67N function analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600 In such case the pre processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre processing block by using the following formula 3 Pol I Io IA IB IC EQUATION2019...

Page 208: ... by for example using one of the following functions if available in the IED 1 Distance protection directional function 2 Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection function 8 2 7 4 Directional detection for ground fault function GUID FC382DD3 E2C8 455E 8CD5 1DE1793DD178 v6 Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for the ground fault...

Page 209: ...ailable inverse curves please refer to section Inverse characteristics Type of reset characteristic Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI Reset By this parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step For the complete list of available reset curves please refer to section Inverse characteristics Time delay related settings By these parameter settings the properties like defin...

Page 210: ...trainx Disabled Pickupx BLKx BLOCK OR 2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int MultPUx Characteristx Inverse Characteristx DefTime DirModex Off DirModex Non directional DirModex Forward DirModex Reverse AND AND FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int OR OR STEPx_DIR_Int ANSI10000008 4 en vsd X T F a b a b b a a b IMinx AND tMin BLKTR AND EMULTX ANSI10000008 V3 EN US Figure 59 Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x whe...

Page 211: ...ty current Iop is always used the polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways 1 When polMethod Voltage VPol will be used as polarizing quantity 2 When polMethod Current IPol will be used as polarizing quantity 3 When polMethod Dual VPol IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity T...

Page 212: ...bled to trip as soon as Iop is bigger than 40 of IDirPU and the directional condition is fulfilled in the set direction The relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristic The directional comparison will set the output binary signals 1 PUFW 1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos φ AngleRCA is bigger than setting par...

Page 213: ...RVS AND AND AND PUFW FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int AND ANSI07000067 4 en vsd VPol VIPol I3PDIR VTPol IopDir Complex Number a a b b IPol T F 0 0 polMethod Current OR ANSI07000067 V4 EN US Figure 61 Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step 8 2 7 9 Second harmonic blocking element M13941 200 v8 A harmonic restrain can be chosen for each step b...

Page 214: ...gnificant The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing is a little delayed compared to the first transformer Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched...

Page 215: ...ure M13941 211 v5 Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are the switch on to fault logic SOTF and the under time logic The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate SOTF the under time logic or both When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault for example during an autoreclosing sequence The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance...

Page 216: ...the pickup signal from the step 4 The under time logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function The under time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after switc...

Page 217: ...mmand PUST4 SOTF Undertime TRIP Disabled OR Undertime SOTF SOTF ANSI06000643 5 en vsdx ANSI06000643 V5 EN US Figure 63 Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and under time features M13941 3 v6 Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC 51N 67N function is shown in Figure 64 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 211 Technical manual ...

Page 218: ... 8 Technical data IP11455 1 v1 M15223 1 v17 Table 105 EF4PTOC 51N 67N technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Trip current step 1 4 1 2500 of IBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Reset ratio 95 at 10 2500 of IBase Relay characteristic angle RCA 180 to 180 degrees 2 0 degrees Trip current for directional release 1 100 of IBase For RCA 60 degrees 2 5 of In at I In 2 5 of I at I In Indepe...

Page 219: ... time pickup non directional at 10 x Iset to 0 Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 8 3 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC 46I2 GUID E8CF8AA2 AF54 4FD1 A379 3E55DCA2FA3A v1 8 3 1 Identification GUID E1720ADA 7F80 4F2C 82A1 EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification...

Page 220: ...o communication or voltage transformer circuit failure Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme The same logic as for directional zero sequence current can be used Current reversal and weak end infeed functionality are available 8 3 3 Function block GUID 8EDB8B12 0D86 4F6B A1FB F5D0C72AA545 v2 NS4PTOC 46I2...

Page 221: ...ickup multiplier is in use for step2 MULTPU3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated the pickup multiplier is in use for step3 MULTPU4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated the pickup multiplier is in use for step4 PID 4151 OUTPUTSIGNALS v4 Table 107 NS4PTOC 46I2 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2 TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip...

Page 222: ... Mod inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Time delay characteristic for step 1 I2 1 1 2500 IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for step 1 in of IBase t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time char is selected TD1 0 05 99...

Page 223: ...op level for step 2 in of IBase t2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time char is selected TD2 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected time characteristic IMin2 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 50 Minimum current for step 2 t2Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 2 MultPU2 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for scal...

Page 224: ...IMin3 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 33 Minimum current for step 3 t3Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 3 MultPU3 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 DirModeSel4 Disabled Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 4 Disabled Nondir Forward Reverse Characterist4 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very...

Page 225: ...0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve for step 1 tBCrv1 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve for step 1 tCCrv1 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve for step 1 tPRCrv1 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 1 tTRCrv1 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Param TR for customi...

Page 226: ... 0 500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 3 tTRCrv3 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 3 tCRCrv3 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 3 ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4 Instantaneous IEC ANSI tReset4 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Reset...

Page 227: ...3P input used for Operating Quantity 2 V3P input used for Polarizing Quantity 3 I3PDIR input used for Directional finding These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre processing function blocks in the Configuration Tool within PCM600 8 3 7 1 Operating quantity within the function GUID 8F0A5BDE AC98 4188 9085 42A8DF00C476 v3 Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC 46I2 f...

Page 228: ...arizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault Forward Reverse Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC 4612 function uses the voltage polarizing method NS4PTOC 4612 uses the negative sequence voltage V2 as polarizing quantity V3P This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED The pre processing block calculates V2...

Page 229: ...upervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence protection schemes permissive or blocking Each part is described separately in the following sections 8 3 7 5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages GUID D8ACB136 2BA6 4ADA A096 5C38BD12DB72 v2 Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 negative...

Page 230: ...ng of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external binary signal By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence current pickup value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1 Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the following figure ANSI09000684 V1 EN US Figure 66 Simplified logic diagram for negative se...

Page 231: ...termine the direction of the fault AngleRCA Forward Area Iop I2 Vpol V2 Reverse Area ANSI10000031 1 en vsd ANSI10000031 V1 EN US Figure 67 Operating characteristic for fault directional element Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are Directional element is internally enable to trip as soon as Iop is bigger than 40 of INDirPU and the directional condition is fulfille...

Page 232: ...2 phasor operating quantity magnitude is in the reverse area see fig 67 Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60 of setting INDirPU These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication schemes permissive or blocking Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is shown in figure 68 Section 8 1MRK 511...

Page 233: ...gure 68 Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step 8 3 8 Technical data GUID 10E9194D 3AE9 4D0F 867E 473E6F4BF443 v1 GUID E83AD807 8FE0 4244 A50E 86B9AF92469E v6 Table 112 NS4PTOC 46I2 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Trip value step 1 4 1 2500 of lBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Reset ratio 95 at 10 2500 of IBase...

Page 234: ...ource impedance used for current polarization 0 50 3000 00 W phase Trip time pickup non directional at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time pickup non directional at 2 x Iset to 0 Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Trip time pickup non directional at 0 to 10 x Iset Min 5 ms Max 20 ms Reset time pickup non directional at 10 x Iset to 0 Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x ...

Page 235: ...ltage protection In an isolated network that is the network is only coupled to ground via the capacitances between the phase conductors and ground the residual current always has 90º phase shift compared to the residual voltage 3V0 The characteristic angle is chosen to 90º in such a network In resistance grounded networks or in Petersen coil grounded with a parallel resistor the active residual cu...

Page 236: ...ground voltages IN VN ANSI13000013 1 en vsd ANSI13000013 V1 EN US Figure 69 Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0 i e sum of GRPxA GRPxB and GRPxC For 3I0 to be calculated connection is needed to all three phase inputs Directional and power functionality uses IN and VN If a connection is made to GRPxN this signal is used else if connec...

Page 237: ...BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs BLKVN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs PID 3892 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 114 SDEPSDE 67N Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current function TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current TRVN BOOLEA...

Page 238: ... Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode in deg INCosPhiPU 0 25 200 00 IB 0 01 1 00 Set level for 3I0cosFi directional res over current in of IBase SN_PU 0 25 200 00 SB 0 01 10 00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi starting inv time count in of SBase INDirPU 0 25 200 00 IB 0 01 5 00 Set level for directional residual over current prot in of IBase tDef 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Definite...

Page 239: ... release current for all directional modes in of IBase VNRelPU 1 00 300 00 VB 0 01 3 00 Residual release voltage for all direction modes in of VBase Table 116 SDEPSDE 67N Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description tReset 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 040 Time delay used for reset of definite timers in sec tPCrv 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Setting P for customer programmable curve...

Page 240: ...he residual voltage 3V0 SN REAL MVA Measured magnitude of residual power 3I03V0cos Fi RCA ANG FI RCA REAL deg Angle between 3V0 and 3I0 minus RCA Fi RCA 8 4 7 Operation principle 8 4 7 1 Function inputs SEMOD171963 4 v5 The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage Group signals I3P and V3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage which are taken from pre processor bl...

Page 241: ...rrent component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only RCADir is set equal to 90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive The function operates when 3I0 cos φ gets larger than the set value 3V0 Vref 3I0 RCA 0 ROA 90 ang 3I0 ang 3Vref 3I0 cos en06000648_ansi vsd Vref ANSI06000648 V1 EN US Figure 71 RCADir set to 0 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measu...

Page 242: ...e binary input BLKTRDIR When the function picks up binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated If the output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated The trip from this sub function has definite time delay ROADir is Relay Operating Angle ROADir is identifying a window around the reference direction in order ...

Page 243: ...ndicates forward reverse direction to the fault Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 cos φ 180 the set value It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 74 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 237 Technical manual ...

Page 244: ...ADir φ ang 3I0 ang Vref The function operates when 3I0 3V0 cos φ gets larger than the set value SN Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 76 For trip the residual power 3I0 3V0 cos φ the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set levels SN_PU INRelPU and VNRelPU Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR When the function pic...

Page 245: ...urrent protection measuring 3I0 and φ SEMOD171963 48 v4 The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the angle φ ang 3I0 ang Vref is within the sector RCADir ROADir Vref 3V0 Operate area 3I0 RCA 0º ROA 80º ANSI06000652 2 en vsd ANSI06000652 V2 EN US Figure 75 Example of characteristic For trip Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRelPU and INDirPU ...

Page 246: ...ntry faults This function can serve as alternative or backup to distance protection with phase preference logic To assure selectivity the distance protection can block the non directional ground fault current function via the input BLKNDN The non directional function is using the calculated residual current derived as sum of the phase currents This will give a better ability to detect cross countr...

Page 247: ...ignals TRIP and TRUN get activated A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in Figure 76 en06000653_ansi vsd INNonDirPU UN_PU OpMODE INcosPhi Pickup_N INCosPhiPU OpMODE INVNCosPhi INVNCosPhiPU Phi in RCA ROA OpMODE IN and Phi DirMode Forw Forw DirMode Rev Rev PUNDIN TRNDIN PUVN TRVN AND AND AND OR AND AND AND OR PUDIRIN PUFW PUREV 0 t 0 t 0 0 TimeChar DefTime TRDIRIN AND SN t Ti...

Page 248: ...e for non directional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 40 ms Max 65 ms Reset time for non directional residual overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 Min 40 ms Max 65 ms Trip time for directional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 110 ms Max 160 ms Reset time for directional residual overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 Min 20 ms Max 60 ms Independent time delay for non directional residual overvolt...

Page 249: ...n not be detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to trip closer to the thermal limits The three phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal memory The temperature is displayed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit depending on whether the function used is Ther...

Page 250: ...input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip MULTPU BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter PID 3909 INPUTSIGNALS v9 Table 122 LFPTTR 26 Input signals Name Typ...

Page 251: ...ip BFI_3P BOOLEAN Pickup Signal ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal 8 5 5 Settings PID 3908 SETTINGS v7 Table 125 LCPTTR 26 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled TRef 0 300 Deg C 1 90 Final temperature rise above ambient of the line when loaded with IRef IRef 0 400 IB 1 100 The load ...

Page 252: ... Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled TRef 0 600 Deg F 1 160 Final temperature rise above ambient of the line when loaded with IRef IRef 0 400 IB 1 100 The load current in of IBase leading to TRef temperature IMult 1 5 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used for two or more lines Tau 1 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes AlarmTemp 0 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature l...

Page 253: ...pe Values Range Unit Description TTRIP INTEGER Estimated time to trip in min TENRECL REAL Estimated time to reset of lockout in min TEMP REAL Temperature Fahrenheit Calculated temperature of the device TEMPAMB REAL Temperature Fahrenheit Ambient temperature used in the calculations TERMLOAD REAL Temperature relative to operate temperature 8 5 7 Operation principle M12018 3 v10 The sampled analog p...

Page 254: ... Q ç è ø EQUATION1168 V1 EN US Equation 24 where Qn is the calculated present temperature Qn 1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device line or cable The actual temperature of the protecte...

Page 255: ...input RESET _ _ ln final lockout release lockout release final n t t æ ö Q Q ç ç Q Q è ø EQUATION1170 V1 EN US Equation 26 In the above equation the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal TENRECL This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated In some applications the measured cu...

Page 256: ...of time to reset of lockout Calculation of actual temperature Lockout logic AMBTEMP PICKUP TEMP TRIP LOCKOUT TTRIP TENRECL I3P ENMULT SENSFLT ALARM BLKTR BLOCK ANSI09000637 3 en vsd ANSI09000637 V3 EN US Figure 78 Functional overview of LFPTTR LCPTTR 26 Section 8 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Current protection 250 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 257: ... measured current Ip load current before overload occurs Time constant t 1 1000 minutes IEC 60255 149 5 0 or 200 ms whichever is greater Alarm temperature 0 400 F 0 200 C 4 0 F 2 0 C Trip temperature 0 300 C 0 600 F 4 0 F 2 0 C Reset level temperature 0 300 C 0 600 F 4 0 F 2 0 C 8 6 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37 SEMOD156693 1 v4 8 6 1 Identification SEMOD158941 2 v4 Function descrip...

Page 258: ...he turbine and not to protect the generator itself Figure 79 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower and overpower functions respectively The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability On the other hand the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher One should set the underpower IED to trip if...

Page 259: ... BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1 BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2 PID 3709 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 133 GUPPDUP 37 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1 TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2 PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 1 PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 2 P REAL Active Power in MW PPER...

Page 260: ... 01 0 06 Drop off delay for stage 2 Table 135 GUPPDUP 37 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description TD 0 000 0 999 0 001 0 000 Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement P and Q Hysteresis1 0 2 5 0 SB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in SBase Hysteresis2 0 2 5 0 SB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in SBase IMagComp5 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitud...

Page 261: ...e Global Base Value groups Mode A B C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C Pos Seq Selection of measured current and voltage 8 6 6 Monitored data PID 3709 MONITOREDDATA v5 Table 137 GUPPDUP 37 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description P REAL MW Active Power in MW PPERCENT REAL Active power in of SBase Q REAL MVAr Reactive power in MVAr QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in of SBase 8 6 7 Operation ...

Page 262: ...mplex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 138 Table 138 Complex power calculation Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation A B C A A B B C C S V I V I V I EQUATION2055 ANSI V1 EN US Equation 28 Arone AB A BC C S V I V I EQUATION2056 ANSI V1 EN US Equation 29 PosSeq 3 PosSeq PosSeq S V I EQUATION2057 ANSI V1 EN US Equation 30 AB AB A B S V I I EQUATION...

Page 263: ...d if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value After a set time delay TripDelay1 2 a trip TRIP1 2 signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active At activation of any of the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power...

Page 264: ...rom the function in previous execution cycle SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle TD is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties Default value for parameter TD is 0 00 With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering that is without any additional delay When TD is set to value bigger than 0 the...

Page 265: ...ent and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals Analog outputs Monitored data from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report The active power is provided as MW value P or in percent of base power PPERCENT The reactive power is provided as Mvar value Q or in percent of...

Page 266: ...GOPPDOP P 2 DOCUMENT172362 IMG158942 V2 EN US 32 8 7 2 Functionality SEMOD172356 4 v5 The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy Sometimes the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses Then the synchronous generator becomes a synchro...

Page 267: ...One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2 One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1 When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value e g 0 5 or even to 0 2 Underpower IED Overpower IED Q Q P P Tripping point without turbine torque...

Page 268: ...LEAN 0 Block of function BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1 BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2 PID 3710 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 141 GOPPDOP 32 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1 TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2 PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 1 PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 2 P REAL Active power P in MW PPERCE...

Page 269: ... 00 s 0 01 0 06 Drop off delay for stage 2 Table 143 GOPPDOP 32 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description k 0 000 0 999 0 001 0 000 Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement P and Q Hysteresis1 0 2 5 0 SB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in of SBase Hysteresis2 0 2 5 0 SB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in of SBase IMagComp5 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 ...

Page 270: ...obal Base Value groups Mode A B C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C Pos Seq Selection of measured current and voltage 8 7 6 Monitored data PID 3710 MONITOREDDATA v6 Table 145 GOPPDOP 32 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description P REAL MW Active power P in MW PPERCENT REAL Active power P in of SBase Q REAL MVAr Reactive power Q in MVAr QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in of SBase 8 7 7 Operat...

Page 271: ...parent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 146 Table 146 Complex power calculation Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation A B C A B C A B C S V I V I V I EQUATION2038 V1 EN US Equation 38 Arone A C AB BC S V I V I EQUATION2039 V1 EN US Equation 39 PosSeq PosSeq PosSeq S 3 V I EQUATION2040 V1 EN US Equation 40 A B A B AB S V I I EQUATION2041 ...

Page 272: ...he two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function The absolute hysteresis of the stage1 2 is Hysteresis1 2 abs Power1 2 drop power1 2 For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low normally down to 0 02 p u of rated gene...

Page 273: ...tion cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties Default value for parameter k is 0 00 With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering that is without any additional delay When k is set to value bigger than 0 the filtering is enabled A typical value for k 0 92 in case of slow operating functions 8 7 7 2 Calibration of ...

Page 274: ...st current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report The active power is provided as MW value P or in percent of base power PPERCENT The reactive power is provided as Mvar value Q or in percent of base po...

Page 275: ... Step 1 and Step 2 180 0 180 0 degrees 2 0 degrees Trip time pickup at 0 5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and k 0 000 Min 10 ms Max 25 ms Reset time pickup at 2 x Sr to 0 5 x Sr and k 0 000 Min 35 ms Max 55 ms Independent time delay to trip for Step 1 and Step 2 at 0 5 x Sn to 2 x Sn and k 0 000 0 01 6000 00 s 0 2 or 40 ms whichever is greater 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measurement uni...

Page 276: ...270 ...

Page 277: ...rvoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions The two step undervoltage protection function UV2PTUV 27 can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as a long time delayed back up to the primary protection UV2PTUV 27 has two voltage steps each with inverse or definite time delay It has a high reset ratio to allow settings ...

Page 278: ...BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal step 1 BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal step 2 BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 PID 3586 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 149 UV2PTUV 27 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1 TRST1_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase A TRST1_B BOOLEAN Trip signal...

Page 279: ...d Enabled OperationStep1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable execution of step 1 Characterist1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog inv curve Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 from step 1 Pickup1 1 0 100 0 VB 0 1 70 0 Voltage pickup value Definite Time Inver...

Page 280: ...vel blocking mode step 2 IntBlkStVal2 1 50 VB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in of VBase step 2 tBlkUV2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay of internal low level blocking for step 2 HystAbs2 0 0 50 0 VB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis in of VBase step 2 Table 151 UV2PTUV 27 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description tReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Reset ti...

Page 281: ... 0 1 0 0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 DCrv2 0 000 60 000 0 001 0 000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 PCrv2 0 000 3 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 CrvSat2 0 100 1 0 Tuning param for prog under voltage Inverse Time curve step 2 Table 152 UV2PTUV 27 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Des...

Page 282: ...n is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is generated The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal a hysteresis has been included 9 1 7 1 Measurement principle M15326 6 v7 Depending on the set ConnType value UV2PTUV 27 measures either phase to ground voltage or phase...

Page 283: ...The type B curve is described as 2 0 480 0 055 Vpickup V 32 0 5 Vpickup TD t æ ö ç è ø EQUATION1608 V1 EN US Equation 51 The customer programmable curve can be created as P TD A t D Vpickup V B C Vpickup é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú æ ö ê ú ç è ø ë û EQUATION1609 V1 EN US Equation 52 When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity There will be an undesired discontinuity...

Page 284: ... for the inverse time mode TUV If the pickup condition with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 pickup for the inverse time the corresponding pickup output is reset After leaving the hysteresis area the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and...

Page 285: ...d Instantaneous Measured Voltage tIReset1 ANSI05000010 3 en vsd ANSI05000010 V3 EN US Figure 89 Voltage profile not causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 9 Voltage protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 279 Technical manual ...

Page 286: ...tantaneous Measured Voltage tIReset1 ANSI05000011 2 en vsd ANSI05000011 V2 EN US Figure 90 Voltage profile causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types Definite timer delay Section 9 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Voltage protection 280 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 287: ...aneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured a b a b Pickup1 V TRST1 PU_ST1 AND 0 t1 tReset1 0 R ANSI09000785 3 en vsd ANSI09000785 V3 EN US Figure 91 Logic diagram for step 1 DT operation Pickup1 PU_ST1 TRST1 tReset1 t1 ANSI10000039 3 en vsd ANSI10000039 V3 EN US Figure 92 Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 9 Voltage protection Phasor measurement...

Page 288: ...decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1 either the trip output of step 1 or both the trip and the PICKUP outputs of step 1 are blocked The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter This internal blocking can also be set to Disabled resulting in no voltage based blocking Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2 In case of disconnection of the hi...

Page 289: ...se voltages Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used The voltages are individually compared to the set value and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP condition The design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PT...

Page 290: ... 2 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 2 Phase 1 Time integrator tIReset2 ResetTypeCrv2 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Time integrator tIReset1 ResetTypeCrv1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 VA VB VC TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR PICKUP IntBlkStVal1 t1 t1Reset IntBlkStVal2 t2Reset t2 ANSI05000012 3 en vsd ANSI05000012 V3 EN US Figure 95 Schematic des...

Page 291: ...aracteristics 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 or 40ms whichever is greater Trip time pickup at 2 x Vset to 0 Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time pickup at 0 to 2 x Vset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Trip time pickup at 1 2 x Vset to 0 Min 5 ms Max 25 ms Reset time pickup at 0 to 1 2 x Vset Min 15 ms Max 35 ms Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1 2 x Vset to 0 Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 9 2 Two step overvoltage ...

Page 292: ...elayed OV2PTOV 59 has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage 9 2 3 Function block M13803 3 v6 ANSI06000277 2 en vsd OV2PTOV 59 V3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2 TRIP TRST1 TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C TRST2 TRST2_A TRST2_B TRST2_C PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2 PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C ANSI06000277 V2 EN US Figure 96 OV2PTOV 59 function block 9 2 4 Signa...

Page 293: ..._A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase A TRST2_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase B TRST2_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase C PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1 PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase A PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase B PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase C PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup si...

Page 294: ... 1 10 0 01 0 05 Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 HystAbs1 0 0 50 0 VB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis in of VBase step 1 OperationStep2 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable execution of step 2 Characterist2 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog inv curve Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2 OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of ...

Page 295: ...curve for step 1 CrvSat1 0 100 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve step 1 tReset2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased Instantaneous Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2 tIReset2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Time delay in Inverse Time reset s step 2 ACrv2 0 005 200...

Page 296: ... out of 3 of the measured voltages being above the set point If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay the corresponding trip signal is issued The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time or inverse time delayed The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base ...

Page 297: ...activate the PICKUP outputs Either 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal a hysteresis is included 9 2 7 2 Time delay M15330 10 v11 The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay DT or inverse time delay TOV For the inverse...

Page 298: ...ero the time delay will be infinity There will be an undesired discontinuity Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup 1 0 CrvSatn 100 the used voltage will be Vpickup 1 0 CrvSatn 100 If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that 0 100 CrvSatn B C EQUATION1435 V1 EN US Equation 60 The hi...

Page 299: ...me the corresponding PICKUP output is reset after that the defined reset time has elapsed Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area The hysteresis value for each step is settable HystAbsn where n means either 1 or 2 respectively to allow a high and ac...

Page 300: ... Timer Linearly decreased Instantaneous Measured Voltage tIReset1 ANSI05000019 V3 EN US Figure 98 Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types Section 9 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Voltage protection 294 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 301: ... the PICKUP signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types Definite time delay When definite time delay is selected the function will trip as shown in figure 100 Detailed information about individual stage reset operation behavior is shown in figure 101 and figure 102 respectively Note that by setting tResetn 0 0s where n means 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 9 Voltage protection Pha...

Page 302: ...y ANSI10000100 2 en vsd ANSI10000100 V2 EN US Figure 100 Logic diagram for step 1 definite time delay DT operation Pickup1 PICKUP TRIP tReset1 t1 ANSI10000037 2 en vsd ANSI10000037 V2 EN US Figure 101 Example for step 1 Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset Section 9 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Voltage protection 296 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 303: ...tep 2 9 2 7 4 Design M15330 34 v8 The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase to ground voltages or the three phase to phase voltages Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration A special logic is i...

Page 304: ...Time integrator tIReset2 ResetTypeCrv2 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Time integrator tIReset1 ResetTypeCrv1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 VA VB VC TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR PICKUP TRST2 B Pickup 1 Pickup 1 Pickup 2 Pickup 2 Pickup 2 Phase B Phase C t1 t1Reset t2 t2Reset ANSI05000013 2 en vsd ANSI05000013 V2 EN US Figure 103 Sche...

Page 305: ...hever is greater Definite time delay high step step 2 at 0 to 1 2 x Vset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 45 ms whichever is greater Minimum trip time Inverse characteristics 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 45 ms whichever is greater Trip time pickup at 0 to 2 x Vset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time pickup at 2 x Vset to 0 Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Trip time pickup at 0 to 1 2 x Vset Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Reset time pickup at 1...

Page 306: ...300 ...

Page 307: ...chemes gas turbine startup and so on Separate definite time delays are provided for trip and restore SAPTUF 81 is provided with undervoltage blocking The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase phase or three phase neutral voltages to be connected For information about how to connect analog inputs refer to Application manual IED application Analog inputs ...

Page 308: ...Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled PUFrequency 35 00 75 00 Hz 0 01 48 80 Frequency set value IntBlockLevel 0 0 100 0 VB 1 0 50 0 Internal blocking level in of VBase tDelay 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Operate time delay tReset 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay for reset tRestore 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Restore time de...

Page 309: ... unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued 10 1 6 1 Measurement principle M13354 6 v8 The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously...

Page 310: ... the RESTORE output of SAPTUF 81 a 100ms pulse is issued after a time delay corresponding to the setting of tRestore when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq after an issue of the TRIP output signal If tRestore is se to 0 000 s the restore functionality is disabled and no output will be given 10 1 6 3 Voltage dependent time delay M13354 19 v5 Since ...

Page 311: ...characteristics are shown in figure 105 for VMin 90 100 t_MaxTrip Delay 1 0 s t_MinTripD elay 0 0 s Exponent 0 1 2 3 and 4 90 95 100 0 0 5 1 en05000075_ansi vsd TimeDlyOperate s V of VBase Exponenent 0 1 2 3 4 ANSI05000075 V1 EN US Figure 105 Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81 The time delay to trip is plotted as a function of the measured voltag...

Page 312: ...measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults The time integrator can trip either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq the RESTO...

Page 313: ...TUF 81 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Trip value pickup function at symmetrical three phase voltage 35 00 75 00 Hz 2 0 mHz Trip time pickup at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz fn 50 Hz Min 80 ms Max 95 ms fn 60 Hz Min 65 ms Max 80 ms Reset time pickup at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Trip time definite time function at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 0 000 60 000 s 0 2...

Page 314: ...n IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Overfrequency protection SAPTOF f SYMBOL O V1 EN US 81 10 2 2 Functionality M14953 3 v12 Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF 81 is applicable in all situations where reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network Close to the ...

Page 315: ...280 V2 EN US Figure 107 SAPTOF 81 function block 10 2 4 Signals PID 6751 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 167 SAPTOF 81H Input signals Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for voltage inputs BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output PID 6751 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 168 SAPTOF 81H Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip ...

Page 316: ...responding to the chosen time delay the corresponding TRIP signal is issued To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued 10 2 6 1 Measurement principle M1495...

Page 317: ...ay plus minimum trip time of the pickup function 80 90 ms 10 2 6 3 Blocking M14958 13 v7 It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81 partially or completely by binary input signals or by parameter settings where BLOCK blocks the START and TRIP outputs BLKTRIP blocks the TRIP output If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel both the PICKUP and the TRI...

Page 318: ...ase voltage 35 00 90 00 Hz 2 0 mHz Trip time pickup at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz fn 50Hz Min 80 ms Max 95 ms fn 60 Hz Min 65 ms Max 80 ms Reset time pickup at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Trip time definite time function at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 100 ms whichever is greater Reset time definite time function at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 0 000 60 00...

Page 319: ...tage blocking The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase phase or three phase neutral voltages to be connected For information about how to connect analog inputs refer to Application manual IED application Analog inputs Setting guidelines 10 3 3 Function block M14968 3 v6 ANSI06000281 2 en vsd SAPFRC 81 V3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP PICKUP RESTORE BLKDM...

Page 320: ...APFRC 81R Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 10 3 6 Operation principle M14970 3 v9 Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC 81 is used to detect fast power system frequency changes at an early stage SAPFRC 81 has a settable definite time delay If the rate of change of frequency remains ...

Page 321: ...elay Trip signal issuing requires that the rate of change of frequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay tDelay If the PICKUP condition with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time tReset the PICKUP output is reset after that the defined reset time has elapsed Here it should be noted that afte...

Page 322: ...The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and faults The time integrator operates with a definite delay time When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad is essential and controls if the function is ...

Page 323: ...lockLevel BLKDMAGN Rate of change of Frequency BLOCK OR BLKREST f RestoreFreq tRestore restore AND BLKTRIP trip AND pickup Pickup Trip output logic Definite timer tReset tDealy Frequency ANSI16000040 V1 EN US Figure 110 Simplified logic diagram for SAPFRC 81 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 10 Frequency protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 317 Technical manual ...

Page 324: ...ection FTAQFVR 81A is based on measured system frequency and time counters FTAQFVR 81A for generator protection provides the BFI_3P output for a particular settable frequency limit when the system frequency falls in that settable frequency band limit and positive sequence voltage within settable voltage band limit The BFI_3P signal triggers the individual event timer which is the continuous time s...

Page 325: ... signal for three phase current V3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for three phase voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function CBCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed status input CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open status input LOADINIT BOOLEAN 0 Loads the initial accumulation time to the function HOLDACC BOOLEAN 0 Holds the time accumulation when input is activated RESETACC BOOLEAN 0 Resetting the a...

Page 326: ...on time limit for frequency band limits FreqHighLimit 35 00 90 00 Hz 0 01 47 50 Frequency High limit value FreqLowLimit 30 00 85 00 Hz 0 01 47 00 Frequency Low limit value CBCheck Disable Enable Enable Enabling the generator start or stop detection logic PickupCurrentLevel 5 0 100 0 IB 0 1 10 0 Threshold current value of generator in percentage of base current EnaVoltCheck Disable Enable Enable En...

Page 327: ... PICKUP signals are activated The BFI_3P signal is controlled by the measured current and voltage input magnitude and the status of the circuit breaker position FTAQFVR 81A function will block BFI_3P signal activation and Accumulation of time under two following conditions even if the system frequency falls within set band limits When the generator is not synchronized as indicated by the CBOPEN si...

Page 328: ...ters the time passing whenever the BFI_3P output is activated It holds the registered time value even when the BFI_3P signal is deactivated and continues from the registered value when the BFI_3P signal is reactivated The registration of accumulation time is frozen at its present value when the input HOLDACC or BLOCK is activated The accumulation time can be set to the initTimeAcc parameter value ...

Page 329: ...e a proper operation the set frequency high limit should be more than the set frequency low limit To avoid malfunction a check is performed that FreqHighLimit is greater than FreqLowLimit If not the ERROR signal is activated FTAQFVR 81A can be instantiated with one or more frequency ranges according to the turbine manufacturer s specification When the frequency falls in to the common zone when two...

Page 330: ... for voltage band limit check 0 0 200 0 of VBase 0 5 of Vn at V Vn 0 5 of V at V Vn Trip value current pickup level 5 0 100 0 of IBase 1 0 of Ir or 0 01 A at I In Independent time delay for the continuous time limit at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 0 0 6000 0 s 0 2 or 250 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay for the accumulation time limit at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 10 0 90000 0 s 0 ...

Page 331: ...000372 2 en vsd CVGAPC I3P V3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 PICKUP PU_OC1 PU_OC2 PU_UC1 PU_UC2 PU_OV1 PU_OV2 PU_UV1 PU_UV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 VDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE VIANGLE ANSI05000372 V2 EN US Figure 113 CVGAPC f...

Page 332: ...r current function UC2 BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1 BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1 BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2 BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2 BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1 BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1 BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of unde...

Page 333: ...tage function OV1 PU_OV2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV2 PU_UV1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV1 PU_UV2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV2 BLK2ND BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 nondir forward reverse DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 nondir forward reverse VDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for dir...

Page 334: ...red inside function OperHarmRestr Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable operation of 2nd harmonic restrain l_2nd l_fund 10 0 50 0 1 0 20 0 Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in BlkLevel2nd 10 5000 IB 1 5000 Harm analyse disabled above this current level in of fundamental current EnRestrainCurr Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable current restrain function RestrCurrInput PosSeq ...

Page 335: ...0 01 0 05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control Disabled Disabled Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function VDepMode_OC1 Step Slope Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 step slope VDepFact_OC1 0 02 5 00 0 01 1 00 Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC1 is voltage dependent VLowLimit_OC1 1 0 200 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in of UBa...

Page 336: ... control Disabled Disabled Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function VDepMode_OC2 Step Slope Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 step slope VDepFact_OC2 0 02 5 00 0 01 1 00 Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC2 is voltage dependent VLowLimit_OC2 1 0 200 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in of UBase VHighLimit_OC2 1 0 200 0 VB 0 1 100 0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in of UBa...

Page 337: ...abled Enabled Disabled Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation_OV1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable operation of OV1 PickupVolt_OV1 2 0 200 0 VB 0 1 150 0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in of VBase CurveType_OV1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog inv curve Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV1 tDef_OV1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 1 0...

Page 338: ...ed Enabled Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 BlkLowVolt_UV1 0 0 5 0 VB 0 1 0 5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in of VBase Operation_UV2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable operation of UV2 PickupVolt_UV2 2 0 150 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in of VBase CurveType_UV2 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog inv curve Definite time Sel...

Page 339: ... programmable curve for OC1 MultPU_OC2 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2 tResetDef_OC2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 0 00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 P_OC2 0 001 10 000 0 001 0 020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2 A_OC2 0 00...

Page 340: ...efinite time use of OV2 tResetIDMT_OV2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 0 00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse Time curves for OV2 A_OV2 0 005 999 000 0 001 0 140 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 B_OV2 0 500 99 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 C_OV2 0 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 D_OV2 0 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 ...

Page 341: ...programmable curve for UV2 C_UV2 0 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2 D_UV2 0 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2 P_UV2 0 001 10 000 0 001 0 020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2 Table 187 CVGAPC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of...

Page 342: ...or 4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor 5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor 6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude 8 MinPh C...

Page 343: ...asor 2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B voltage phasor 3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C voltage phasor 4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor 5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable ea...

Page 344: ...nimum magnitude Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 190 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections The three phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase to ground voltages VA VB VC or three phase to phase voltages VAB VBC VCA This information about actual VT connection is entered as a se...

Page 345: ...teps M13751 136 v3 Two overcurrent protection steps are available They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity see table 189 with the set pickup level Non directional overcurrent step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level However depen...

Page 346: ...2 gives an overview of the typical choices but not the only possible ones for these two quantities from traditional directional relays Table 192 Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature Set value for the parameter CurrentInput Set value for the parameter VoltageInput Comment PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained Typical setting for RCADir i...

Page 347: ...00252_anis vsd IEC05000252 ANIS V1 EN US Figure 114 I V directional operating principle for CVGAPC function where RCADir is 75 ROADir is 50 The second principle referred to as IcosPhi V in the parameter setting tool checks that that the product I cos Φ is bigger than the set pick up level where Φ is angle between the current phasor and the mta line that the phasor of the measured current is within...

Page 348: ...shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit Voltage restraint control feature M13751 326 v4 The overcurrent protection step operation can be made depend...

Page 349: ...PickupCurr_OC1 VHighLimit_OC1 en05000323_ansi vsd ANSI05000323 V1 EN US Figure 117 Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage It shall be noted that this feature will as well affect the pickup c...

Page 350: ...in current magnitude When set the pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse IDMT time delay in accordance with the end user setting If the pickup signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting 11 1 6 4 Built ...

Page 351: ...n be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting 11 1 6 6 Built in undervoltage protection steps M13751 239 v3 Two undervoltage protection steps are available They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity see table 190 with the set pickup level The undervoltage ste...

Page 352: ...re 119 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose protection function The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function They must all be expressed in true power system primary Amperes and kilovolts 1 Instantaneous values samples of currents voltages from one three phase current and one three phase voltage input 2 Fundamental freq...

Page 353: ...e voltage from the three phase input system see table 190 for internally measured voltage 3 Selects one current from the three phase input system see table 191 for internally measured restraint current 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 11 Multipurpose protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 347 Technical manual ...

Page 354: ...d Selected voltage VDIRLOW TROC1 OC1 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control restraint OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control restraint DIROC2 DIROC1 2nd Harmonic restraint 2nd Harmonic restraint VOLTAGE OR OR Section 11 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Multipurpose protection 348 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 355: ...steps internal OR logic are available from multipurpose function as well Second harmonic check Selected voltage X PickupCurr_OC1 a b a b Voltage control or restraint feature OC1 On BLKOC1 Directionality check Current Restraint Feature Imeasured k Irestraint DIR_OK Inverse 0 DEF DEF time selected Inverse time selected OR Enable second harmonic en05000831_ansi vsd Selected current PU_OC1 TROC1 AND B...

Page 356: ... UC2 has the same internal logic a b a b Selected voltage PickupVolt_OV1 Operation_OV1 On BLKOV1 Inverse time selected en05000751_ansi vsd Inverse 0 DEF DEF time selected PU_OV1 TROV1 AND BLKTROV1 AND OR 0 ANSI05000751 V1 EN US Figure 123 Simplified internal logic diagram for built in first overvoltage step OV1 step OV2 has the same internal logic Section 11 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Multipurpose protect...

Page 357: ... MaxPh Ph MinPh Ph UnbalancePh Ph Measuring voltage input Phase A Phase B Phase C PosSeq NegSeq 3 ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh Phase A Phase B Phase B Phase C Phase C Phase A MaxPh Ph MinPh Ph UnbalancePh Ph Pickup overcurrent step 1 2 2 5000 of IBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Pickup undercurrent step 1 2 2 150 of IBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Independent time delay overcurr...

Page 358: ...0 0 of VBase 0 5 of Vn at V Vn 0 5 of V at V Vn Pickup undervoltage step 1 2 2 0 150 0 of VBase 0 5 of Vn at V Vn 0 5 of V at V Vn Independent time delay overvoltage at 0 8 x Vset to 1 2 x Vset step 1 2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay undervoltage at 1 2 x Vset to 0 8 x Vset step 1 2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Overvoltage Pickup time at...

Page 359: ...undercurrent 105 Reset ratio overvoltage 95 Reset ratio undervoltage 105 Overcurrent Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically Undercurrent Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 Impulse margin time 15 ms typically Overvoltage Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 8 x Vset to 1 2 x Vset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically Underv...

Page 360: ...354 ...

Page 361: ...rd pre processing function block SMAI However the main difference is that it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal Thus it can for example be used to build sub synchronous resonance protection for synchronous generator 12 1 3 Function block GUID FA590757 0DB1 4605 9DE2 20FA8304795F v1 SMAIHPAC BLOCK G3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 IEC13000180 1 en vsd IEC13000180 V1 EN US 1...

Page 362: ...s 0 2 s 0 5 s 1 0 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 1 0 s Approximate length of the filtering window in seconds OverLap 0 95 5 20 Filtering window overlap between two calculations in percent 12 1 6 Operation principle GUID 262C1783 3A0A 46B6 99FC 1202AE8E7519 v2 For all four analogue input signals into this filter i e three phases and the residual quantity the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rat...

Page 363: ...al phases as well as phase to phase phasors True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory Positive sequence phasor Negative sequence phasor Zero sequence phasor etc In order to properly calculate phase to phase phasors from the individual phase phasors or vice versa the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided It defines what quantities i e individual phases or p...

Page 364: ...ends on the setting parameter FilterLength Table 197 gives overview of the used number of samples for phasor calculation by the filter Note that the used number of samples is always a power of number two Table 197 Length of the filtering window Value for parameter FilterLength Used No of samples for calculation fixed independent from rated frequency Corresponding length of the input waveform in mi...

Page 365: ... 5 s 6 0 Hz 7 2 Hz 1 0 s 3 0 Hz 3 6 Hz 2 0 s 1 5 Hz 1 8 Hz 4 0 s 0 8 Hz 1 0 Hz Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the disturbing signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise present in the input signal waveform For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be extracted in 50Hz power system then from Table 198 it can be concluded that FilterL...

Page 366: ...Length see Table 197 The following list gives some examples how this parameter influence the calculation rate for the extracted phasor when OverLap 0 the new phasor value is calculated only once per FilterLength when OverLap 50 the new phasor value is calculated two times per FilterLength when OverLap 75 the new phasor value is calculated four times per FilterLength when OverLap 90 the new phasor ...

Page 367: ...er in Hz Note the very narrow scale on the y axle for b and c Such small scale as well indicates with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub synchronous current component The following can be observed in the Figure The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary The measured magnitude of the sub synchronous cu...

Page 368: ...rrent magnitude and frequency are calculated approximately four times per second that is correct value is four times per 1024 ms Section 12 1MRK 511 408 UUS A System protection and control 362 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 369: ...rcuit supervision CCSSPVC 87 compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping 13 1 3 Function block M124...

Page 370: ...SSPVC 87 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled IMinOp 10 200 IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential pickup in of IBase Table 202 CCSSPVC 87 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup_Block 20 500 IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase current in of IBase Tab...

Page 371: ...eration Enabled The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND gate resets This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element s trip for example during a faul...

Page 372: ...cal data M12358 1 v10 Table 204 CCSSPVC 87 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Trip current 10 200 of IBase 10 0 of In at I In 10 0 of I at I In Reset ratio Trip current 90 Block current 20 500 of IBase 5 0 of In at I In 5 0 of I at I In Reset ratio Block current 90 at 50 500 of IBase 13 2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556 1 v3 Section 13 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Secondary system supe...

Page 373: ...he negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high impedance grounded networks It is based on the negative sequence quantities The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance grounded networks It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting paramete...

Page 374: ...re Circuit Breaker opens protected voltage circuit 89b BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnect switch is open BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active PID 3492 OUTPUTSIGNALS v9 Table 206 FUFSPVC Output signals Name Type Description BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function BLKV BOOLEAN General pickup 3PH BOOLEAN Three phase pickup DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condit...

Page 375: ...1 10 Pickup of residual undercurrent element in of IBase 3V2PU 1 100 VB 1 30 Pickup of negative sequence overvoltage element in of VBase 3I2PU 1 100 IB 1 10 Pickup of negative sequence undercurrent element in of IBase OpDVDI Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation of change based function Disable Enable DVPU 1 100 VB 1 60 Pickup of change in phase voltage in of VBase DIPU 1 100 IB 1 15 Pickup of chang...

Page 376: ...he currents and voltages in all three phases and calculates see figure 130 the zero sequence voltage 3V0 the zero sequence current 3I0 the negative sequence current 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3V2 The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU 3V2PU and 3I2PU The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero sequence voltage i...

Page 377: ...local HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600 Input and output signals M13677 19 v6 The output signals 3PH BLKV and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not present The operation mode selector OpModeSel is set to Di...

Page 378: ...ture circuit breaker The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N C auxiliary contact of the line disconnector The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line cur...

Page 379: ... is closed If this is an important disadvantage connect the 52A input to FALSE then only the first criterion can enable the delta function If the DVDI detection of three phases set the internal signal FuseFailDetDVDI at the level high then the signal FuseFailDetDVDI will remain high as long as the voltage of three phases are lower then the setting VPPU In addition to fuse failure detection two int...

Page 380: ...he sudden change of voltage and current detection is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Disabled Section 13 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Secondary system supervision 374 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 381: ... a b VC IC a b a b AND AND OR OR AND AND FuseFailDetDVDI DVDI Detection DeltaIA DeltaVA DeltaIB DeltaVB DeltaIC DeltaVC ANSI12000166 3 en vsd DVPU DIPU DI detection based on sample analysis DV detection based on sample analysis t 20 ms IC IB IC IB IC IB ANSI12000166 V3 EN US Figure 131 Simplified logic diagram for the DV DI detection part 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 13 Secondary system supervision ...

Page 382: ...ne detection M13679 44 v4 A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 133 A dead phase condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting values VDLDPU and IDLDPU If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated If all three phases are considered to be dead t...

Page 383: ...n operation mode selector OpModeSel has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms The different operation modes are Disabled The negative and zero sequence function is disabled V2I2 Negative sequence is selected V0I0 Zero sequence is selected V0I0 OR V2I2 Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in para...

Page 384: ...lue in its non volatile memory and re establishes the conditions that were present before the shut down All phase voltages must be greater than VSealInPU before fuse failure is de activated and resets the signals BLKU BLKZ and 3PH The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds the zero or negative sequence voltage has...

Page 385: ...Ns AND FuseFailDetNegSeq OR AND AND CurrZeroSeq CurrNegSeq a b a b OR AND AND AND FuseFailDetDUDI AND OpDVDI Enabled DeadLineDet1Ph OR OR OR OR AND VoltZeroSeq VoltNegSeq OR t 5 s AllCurrLow t 150 ms intBlock Fuse failure detection Main logic BLKTRIP AND t 100 ms OR t 20 ms OR ANSI10000033 3 en vsd FusefailStarted ANSI10000033 V3 EN US 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 13 Secondary system supervision Pha...

Page 386: ...quence 1 100 of IBase 0 5 of In Trip voltage change pickup 1 100 of VBase 10 0 of Vn Trip current change pickup 1 100 of IBase 10 0 of In Trip phase voltage 1 100 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Trip phase current 1 100 of IBase 0 5 of In Trip phase dead line voltage 1 100 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Trip phase dead line current 1 100 of IBase 0 5 of In Pickup time 1 ph pickup at 1 x Vn to 0 Min 10 ms Max 25 ms Reset t...

Page 387: ...ction selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC or the selector switch function block is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities in order to have different functions operating on pre set values Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues lower system r...

Page 388: ...00005 1 en vsd IEC14000005 V1 EN US Figure 135 SLGAPC function block 14 1 4 Signals PID 6641 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 211 SLGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary UP command DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary DOWN command Section 14 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Control 382 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technica...

Page 389: ...Selector switch position 15 P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16 P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17 P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18 P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19 P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20 P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21 P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22 P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23 P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24 P25 BOOLEAN ...

Page 390: ... present activated output is P03 and one activates the UP input then the output P04 will be activated When a signal is received on the DOWN input the function will activate the output next to the present activated output in descending order for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated Depending on the output settings the ...

Page 391: ...4 1 7 1 Graphical display SEMOD114931 35 v4 There are two possibilities for SLGAPC if it is used just for the monitoring the switches will be listed with their actual position names as defined by the user max 13 characters if it is used for control the switches will be listed with their actual positions but only the first three letters of the name will be used In both cases the switch full name wi...

Page 392: ...Test Reset Authorization Language Select switch Press the Open or Close key A dialog box appears E The pos will not be modified outputs will not be activated until you press the E button for O K Open Close ANSI06000421 V2 EN US Figure 136 Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI From the single line diagram on local HMI 14 2 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754 1 v3 14 2 1 Identifica...

Page 393: ...5 VSGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input PID 6504 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 216 VSGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked POSITION INTEGER Position indicat...

Page 394: ...HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21 The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen It is important for indicati...

Page 395: ...identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC 14 3 2 Functionality SEMOD55850 5 v7 Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function block is used to send double point position indications to other systems equipment or functions in the substation through IEC 61850 8 1 or other communi...

Page 396: ...cribed in the Engineering manual and define which function block in which systems equipment or functions should receive this information More specifically DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position indication output POSITION by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE together with the logical input signal VALID When the input signal VALID is act...

Page 397: ... number Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC 14 4 2 Functionality SEMOD176462 4 v10 The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LEDs or putting IED in ChangeLock state from remote In this way simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs without confirmat...

Page 398: ...N 0 Blocks the function operation PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection PID 3575 OUTPUTSIGNALS v8 Table 222 SPC8GAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8 Sect...

Page 399: ...se5 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Pulse time output 5 PulseMode6 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 6 tPulse6 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Pulse time output 6 PulseMode7 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 7 tPulse7 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Pulse time output 7 PulseMode8 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 8 tPulse8 0 0...

Page 400: ... Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number AutomationBits command function for DNP3 AUTOBITS 14 5 2 Functionality SEMOD158591 5 v8 Automation bits function for DNP3 AUTOBITS is used within PCM600 to get into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol The AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV...

Page 401: ...25 V1 EN US Figure 140 AUTOBITS function block 14 5 4 Signals PID 3776 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 224 AUTOBITS Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection PID 3776 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 225 AUTOBITS Output signals Name Type Description CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1 CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2 CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command ou...

Page 402: ...DBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20 CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21 CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22 CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23 CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24 CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25 CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26 CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27 CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28 CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29 CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30 CMDBIT...

Page 403: ...acts like an overriding the function still receives data from the DNP3 master Upon deactivation of BLOCK all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again momentarily For AUTOBITS the PSTO input determines the operator place The command can be written to the block while in Remote If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs 14 6 Single command 16 signals SINGLECMD SE...

Page 404: ...e Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10 OUT11 BOO...

Page 405: ...ocal HMI Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in PCM600 The output signals can be of the types Disabled Steady or Pulse This configuration setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block The length of the output pulses are 100 ms In steady mode SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power interruptio...

Page 406: ...400 ...

Page 407: ...ach circuit breaker It provides a settable pulse prolongation time to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length as well as all functionality necessary for correct co operation with autoreclosing functions The trip function block includes a settable latch function for the trip signal and circuit breaker lockout The trip function can collect start and directional signals from different application fu...

Page 408: ...ases TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L1 TRINL2 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L2 TRINL3 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L3 PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1 PSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2 PSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3 1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective carrier aided trip 1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective earth ...

Page 409: ...al 15 1 5 Settings GUID 6D6424B9 B676 4D9B 949A 33C74BDC5711 v1 Table 232 SMPPTRC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On Program 3 phase 1ph 3ph 1ph 2ph 3ph 1ph 3ph Three ph single or three ph single two or three ph trip tTripMin 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 150 Minimum duration of trip output signal tWaitForPHS 0 020 0 500 s 0 001 0 05...

Page 410: ...which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs are routed It has a single three phase trip output TRIP to connect to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal Section 15 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Logic 404 Phasor measurement unit RES67...

Page 411: ...d logic where setting Program 1p 3p TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C TR3P CLLKOUT TR1P BLKLKOUT TRIPALL TRIPL1 TRIPL2 TRIPL3 SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT TRIP Final Tripping Circuits TR_A TR_B TR_C TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT TRINP_3P TRINP_A TRINP_B TRINP_C PS_A PS_B PS_C 1PTRZ 1PTRGF L1TRIP Phase Segregated L2TRIP L3TRIP BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRINP_3P TRINP_A TRINP_B TRINP_C 1PTRZ 1PTRGF PS_A PS_B P3PTR PS_C SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT Simp...

Page 412: ...C 94 function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults A binary input P3PTR is provided which will force all tripping to be three pole This input is required in order to cooperate with the SMBRREC function In multi breaker arrangements one SMPPTRC 94 function block is used for each circuit breaker The lockout functi...

Page 413: ... STN and common directional forward FW and reverse REV are all available as outputs on the trip function All start and directional outputs are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node data model of the trip function The time stamping is updated each time a trip or pickup signal is changed The common CND output general is mapped as dirGeneral 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward reverse 3 both The phase wise...

Page 414: ...se front logic simplified logic diagram ANSI10000056 4 en Original vsd L1TRIP TRINP_3P OR 1PTRGF t tWaitForPHS OR TRINP_A AND PS_A OR OR AND AND PS_B PS_C TRINP_B TRINP_C L2TRIP L3TRIP OR OR OR LOOP AND AND OR 1PTRZ LOOP OR AND AND ANSI10000056 V4 EN US Figure 145 Phase segregated front logic Section 15 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Logic 408 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 415: ...KOUT OR OR TRIPL1 AND TRIPL3 TRIPL2 TRIPALL TR_B TR_C LOOP AND LOOP OR AND OR OR OR OR AND AND OR AND AND OR t 10 ms t 5 ms TR3P AND OR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT AND OR LOOP LOOP AND AND TR1P TR2P CLKLKOUT AutoLock TripLockout TRIP To ensure that the fault is single phase To ensure that the fault is two phase ANSI17000066 V1 EN US Figure 147 Final tripping circuits 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 15 Logic Phas...

Page 416: ...b5 REV_A b6 BFI_B b7 FW_B b8 REV_B b9 BFI_C b10 FW_C b11 REV_C dirPhsA 61850 Standard phase wize 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward reverse dirPhsC 61850 Standard phase wize 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward reverse ANSI16000179 V2 EN US Figure 148 The directional logic 15 1 7 Technical data M12380 1 v12 Table 234 SMPPTRC 94 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Trip action 3 ph 1 3 ph 1 2 3 ph...

Page 417: ... start and directional output signal STDIR to be connected to the Trip function see Figure 149 The purpose of this functionality is to provide general start and directional information for the IEC 61850 trip logic data model SMPPTRC 15 2 3 Function block GUID 99B1DF71 F7C4 4954 8688 BC709C3C2A16 v1 ANSI16000165 1 en Original vsdx SMAGAPC BLOCK PU_DIR1 PU_DIR2 PU_DIR3 PU_DIR4 PU_DIR5 PU_DIR6 PU_DIR...

Page 418: ...nput 9 PU_DIR10 INTEGER 0 Pick up direction input 10 PU_DIR11 INTEGER 0 Pick up direction input 11 PU_DIR12 INTEGER 0 Pick up direction input 12 PU_DIR13 INTEGER 0 Pick up direction input 13 PU_DIR14 INTEGER 0 Pick up direction input 14 PU_DIR15 INTEGER 0 Pick up direction input 15 PU_DIR16 INTEGER 0 Pick up direction input 16 PID 6906 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 236 SMAGAPC Output signals Name Type De...

Page 419: ...verseN The StartMatrix function contains two function the START criteria and the DIRECTION criteria see Figure 150 The START criteria is to ensure that a forward and reverse signal shall come together with a start signal to pass through the block This is done individually for each protection function connected to the StartMatrix via the STDIRX inputs see Figure 151 All STDIROUT signals are then co...

Page 420: ...Criteria PU_DIRX CNDOUT START Criteria PU_DIRX CNDOUT START Criteria PU_DIRX CNDOUT START Criteria PU_DIRX CNDOUT START Criteria PU_DIRX CNDOUT START Criteria PU_DIRX CNDOUT OR PU_DIR1 PU_DIR2 PU_DIR3 PU_DIR4 PU_DIR5 PU_DIR6 PU_DIR7 PU_DIR8 PU_DIR9 PU_DIR10 PU_DIR11 PU_DIR12 PU_DIR13 PU_DIR14 PU_DIR15 PU_DIR16 CND SMAGAPC StartMatrix ANSI16000161 2 en vsdx PU_DIRX PU_DIRX ANSI16000161 V2 EN US Fig...

Page 421: ...1 EN US Figure 151 The START Criteria function BFI_3P in BFI_A in BFI_C in AND FW in AND REV in FW_A in REV_A in BFI_3P out FW out REV out BFI_A out FW_A out REV_A out BFI_B out FW_B out REV_B out BFI_C out FW_C out REV_C out XOR AND AND FW_B in REV_B in XOR AND AND FW_C in REV_C in XOR BFI_B in DIRECTION Criteria in b0 IntToBits b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 PU_DIRIN CND out b0 B...

Page 422: ...b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b0 START start b1 FW forward b2 REV reverse b3 STL1 startL1 b4 FWL1 forwardL1 b5 REVL1 reverseL1 b6 STL2 startL2 b7 FWL2 forwardL2 b8 REVL2 reverseL2 b9 STL3 startL3 b10 FWL3 forwardL3 b11 REVL3 reverseL3 b12 STN startN b13 FWN forwardN b14 REVN reverseN STARTCOMB BLOCK BFI_3P FW REV BFI_A FW_A REV_A BFI_B FW_B REV_B BFI_C FW_C REV_C STN FWN REVN CND ANSI16000166...

Page 423: ...2 Phase wise STLx FWLx and REVLx where x 1 2 and 3 Protection 3 STN FWN and REVN Protection 4 STDIR Connection example In Figure 154 below is an example how to connect start and directional signals from protection functions via STARTCOMB and SMAGAPC to SMPPTRC 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 15 Logic Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 417 Technical manual ...

Page 424: ...CND SMAGAPC BLOCK PU_DIR1 PU_DIR2 PU_DIR3 PU_DIR4 PU_DIR5 PU_DIR6 PU_DIR7 PU_DIR8 PU_DIR9 PU_DIR10 PU_DIR11 PU_DIR12 PU_DIR13 PU_DIR14 PU_DIR15 PU_DIR16 CND SMPPTRC 94 BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRINP_3P TRINP_A TRINP_B TRINP_C PS_A PS_B PS_C 1PTRZ 1PTRGF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT CND TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT BFI_3P BFI_A BFI_B BFI_C STN FW REV ANSI16000164 2 en vsdx ANSI16000164 V2 EN US Figu...

Page 425: ...ected to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or steady output 15 3 3 Function block SEMOD54400 4 v6 TMAGAPC BLOCK BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INP...

Page 426: ...1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11 INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12 INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13 INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14 INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16 INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17 INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18 INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19 INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20 INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21 INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2...

Page 427: ...ulse time OnDelay 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Output on delay time OffDelay 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Output off delay time ModeOutput1 Steady Pulsed Steady Mode for output 1 steady or pulsed ModeOutput2 Steady Pulsed Steady Mode for output 2 steady or pulsed ModeOutput3 Steady Pulsed Steady Mode for output 3 steady or pulsed 15 3 6 Operation principle SEMOD52537 5 v8 The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC...

Page 428: ...f it shall give a pulse with duration set by PulseTime Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are connected in an OR function a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are reset and then one is activated again For steady operation the OffDelay will pickup when all related inputs have reset Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 156 PulseTime OUTPUT 1 Pulse...

Page 429: ...F v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Logic for group alarm ALMCALH 15 4 2 Functionality GUID 16E60E27 F7A8 416D 8648 8174AAC49BB5 v4 The group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to a common indication LED and or contact in the IED 15 4 3 Function block GUID EA192656 71DD 4D44 A1D5 96B1B4937971 v1 ...

Page 430: ...AN 0 Binary input 10 INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11 INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12 INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13 INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14 INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16 PID 6510 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 243 ALMCALH Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16 15 4 5 Settings PID 6510 SETTINGS v5 Table 2...

Page 431: ... off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady signal ALARM Input 1 Input 16 1 ANSI13000191 1 en vsd 200 ms 0 ANSI13000191 V1 EN US Figure 157 Group alarm logic 15 4 7 Technical data GUID A05AF26F DC98 4E62 B96B E75D19F20767 v1 Table 245 Number of ALMCALH instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms ALMCALH 5 15 5 Logic for group warning WRNCALH 15 5 1 Identific...

Page 432: ...ID 4127 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 246 WRNCALH Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary ...

Page 433: ... 7B6C 499F BFCD E418AA55F7EC v2 The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 WARNING output signal The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the function block When any one of 16 input signals INPUT1 to INPUT16 has logical value 1 the WARNING output signal wil...

Page 434: ...c for group indication INDCALH 15 6 2 Functionality GUID D8D1A4EE A87F 46C6 8529 277FC1ADA9B0 v4 The group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication signals to a common indication LED and or contact in the IED 15 6 3 Function block GUID 9D89E183 449A 4016 AB83 E57C8DDBA843 v1 IEC13000183 1 en vsd INDCALH BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPU...

Page 435: ...EAN 0 Binary input 10 INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11 INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12 INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13 INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14 INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16 PID 4128 OUTPUTSIGNALS v4 Table 251 INDCALH Output signals Name Type Description IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16 15 6 5 Settings PID 4128 SETTINGS v4 Table 25...

Page 436: ...0 ANSI13000193 V1 EN US 15 6 7 Technical data GUID EAA43288 01A5 49CF BF5B 9ABF6DC27D85 v1 Table 253 Number of INDCALH instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INDCALH 5 15 7 Basic configurable logic blocks M11396 4 v16 The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of signals have no suffix QT at the end of their function name A number of logic...

Page 437: ... reset or set an output from two inputs respectively Each block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption RESET input has priority SRMEMORY function block is a flip flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively Each block has two outputs where ...

Page 438: ...7 INPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 254 AND Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4 PID 3437 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 255 AND Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal 15 7 1 3 Technical data GUID D1179280 1D99 4A66 91AC B734...

Page 439: ...ls Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate PID 3801 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 258 GATE Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate 15 7 2 3 Settings PID 3801 SETTINGS v6 Table 259 GATE Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled 15 7 2 4 Technical data GUID 45DF373F DC39 4...

Page 440: ... OUT BOOLEAN Output 15 7 3 3 Technical data GUID 0EC4192A EF03 47C0 AEC1 09B68B411A98 v2 Table 263 Number of INV instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INV 90 90 240 15 7 4 Loop delay function block LLD GUID 05D959B5 A55B 437C 8E8F 831A4A357E24 v2 GUID 64B24094 010D 4B8F 8B7B DDD49499AAE5 v3 The Logic loop delay function block LLD function is used to delay the output signa...

Page 441: ...tion OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle 15 7 4 3 Technical data GUID B2E6F510 8766 4381 9618 CE02ED71FFB6 v1 Table 266 Number of LLD instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms LLD 10 10 20 15 7 5 OR function block IP11012 1 v3 M11449 3 v2 The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables The OR function block has up to si...

Page 442: ...N 0 Input 3 to OR gate INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate PID 3806 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 268 OR Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate 15 7 5 3 Technical data GUID 35A795D7 A6BD 4669 A023 43C497DBFB01 v3 Table 269 Number of OR instances Logic block Quant...

Page 443: ...sd IEC04000407 V3 EN US Figure 163 PULSETIMER function block 15 7 6 2 Signals PID 6985 INPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 270 PULSETIMER Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer PID 6985 OUTPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 271 PULSETIMER Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer 15 7 6 3 Settings PID 6985 SETTINGS v1 Table 272 PULSETIMER Non group setti...

Page 444: ...he memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption For a Reset Set flip flop RESET input has higher priority over SET input Table 274 Truth table for RSMEMORY function block RESET SET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last value Inverted last value 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 15 7 7 1 Function block GUID 50D5A4C0 59BF 44DE 86AC 47640AC...

Page 445: ...00 ms RSMEMORY 10 10 20 15 7 8 Set reset with memory function block SRMEMORY IP11020 1 v2 M11485 3 v4 The Set reset with memory function block SRMEMORY is a flip flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to ...

Page 446: ...ut signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal 15 7 8 3 Settings PID 3813 SETTINGS v5 Table 282 SRMEMORY Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Memory Disabled Enabled Enabled Operating mode of the memory function 15 7 8 4 Technical data GUID 7A0F4327 CA83 4FB0 AB28 7C5F17AE6354 v1 Table 283 Number of SRMEMORY instances ...

Page 447: ... the operation of the timer On Off t tdelay tdelay IEC08000289 2 en vsd Input IEC08000289 V2 EN US Figure 166 TIMERSET status diagram 15 7 9 1 Function block M11495 3 v3 IEC04000411 2 en vsd TIMERSET INPUT ON OFF IEC04000411 V2 EN US Figure 167 TIMERSET function block 15 7 9 2 Signals PID 6976 INPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 284 TIMERSET Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to t...

Page 448: ...17 v2 Table 287 Number of TIMERSET instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms TIMERSET 15 15 30 0 000 90000 000 s 0 5 10 ms 15 7 10 Exclusive OR function block XOR IP11018 1 v2 M11477 3 v4 The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables XOR has two inputs and two outputs One of the outputs is inverted The...

Page 449: ...15 7 10 3 Technical data GUID 0B07F78C 10BD 4070 AFF0 6EE36454AA03 v1 Table 291 Number of XOR instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms XOR 10 10 20 15 8 Configurable logic blocks Q T GUID 0CA6511A E8BD 416E 9B59 5C6BD98C60B7 v5 The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time stamp and the quality of the input signals have suffix QT at the end of their function name The f...

Page 450: ...ock that inverts the input signal and propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signal ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signals Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used for example for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs The function also p...

Page 451: ...ion block has four inputs and two outputs 15 8 1 1 Function block GUID 4CEE3C76 A39D 4C33 AD55 88C570210F2B v2 ANDQT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 OUT NOUT IEC09000297 1 en vsd IEC09000297 V1 EN US Figure 169 ANDQT function block 15 8 1 2 Signals GUID 4543C4C9 FAE2 4328 8DE2 4A5756A020E9 v1 PID 3800 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 292 ANDQT Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input si...

Page 452: ...e SP_OUT output changes the Event bit in the state part is toggled INDCOMBSPQT can propagate the quality the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850 15 8 2 1 Function block GUID 55B49FC7 8239 4891 BE16 29296A8F40BE v1 INDCOMBSPQT SP_IN TIME BLOCKED SUBST INVALID TEST SP_OUT IEC15000146 vsd IEC15000146 V1 EN US Figure 170 INDCOMBSPQT function block 15 8 2 2 Signals GUID 4543C4C9 FAE2...

Page 453: ...ime part of single point input is copied to the TIME output The state bits in the common part and the indication part of the input signal are copied to the corresponding state output INDEXTSPQT can propagate the quality the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850 15 8 3 1 Function block GUID 04AA5209 B919 4161 A585 336CE9618A89 v2 INDEXTSPQT SI_IN SI_OUT TIME BLOCKED SUBST INVALID T...

Page 454: ...n block INVALIDQT GUID 66C6DCEE 1F0E 4EB8 9ADB 97F8B41E53DF v4 Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a valid input The values of the input signals INPUTx where 1 x 16 are copied to the outputs OUTPUTx where 1 x 16 If the input VALID is 0 or if its quality bit is set invalid all outputs OUTPUTx where 1 x 16 quality bit will be set to invalid The time stamp of any output OUTPU...

Page 455: ...able 301 INVALIDQT Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9 INPUT10 BOOLE...

Page 456: ...N Indication output 10 OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11 OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12 OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13 OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14 OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15 OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16 15 8 4 3 Technical data GUID 77FEBE9B 0882 4E85 8B1A 7671807BFC02 v2 Table 303 Number of INVALIDQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 m...

Page 457: ... 5 3 Technical data GUID F25B94C6 9CC9 48A0 A7A3 47627D2B56E2 v1 Table 306 Number of INVERTERQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INVERTERQT 20 100 15 8 6 ORQT function block GUID F8F8D591 F895 4BCB ADBD 5F95E7B70FEB v2 GUID F8AECD9C 83FC 4025 9AB5 809D88122277 v4 The ORQT function block ORQT is used to form general combinatory expressions OR with boolean variables OR...

Page 458: ...nal 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6 PID 3807 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 308 ORQT Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal 15 8 6 3 Technical data GUID 88B27B3C 26D2 47AF 9878 CC19018171B1 v1 Table 309 Number of ORQT ...

Page 459: ...input to the output at each execution cycle A change of these bits will not lead to an updated time stamp on the output PULSETIMERQT can propagate the quality value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850 15 8 7 1 Function block GUID C0490ECF 5C4E 4F17 B628 482694C590D2 v1 PULSETIMERQT INPUT OUT IEC15000145 vsd IEC15000145 V1 EN US Figure 175 PULSETIMERQT function block 15 8 7 2 Signals G...

Page 460: ...7626CE2 v5 The Reset set function RSMEMORYQT is a flip flop with memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively Each RSMEMORYQT function block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption For a Reset Set flip flop the RESET input has higher prior...

Page 461: ...OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 316 RSMEMORYQT Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal 15 8 8 3 Settings PID 3812 SETTINGS v5 Table 317 RSMEMORYQT Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Memory Disabled Enabled Enabled Operating mode of the memory function 15 8 8 4 Technical data GUID 94C803B4 6C5A 4072 AB5C 20DDE98C9A7...

Page 462: ...me stamps of the signals via IEC 61850 Table 319 Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block SET RESET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last value Inverted last value 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 If Memory parameter is Enabled the output result is stored in semi retained memory 15 8 9 1 Function block GUID 8B04BA86 9685 4E73 9C04 3AE74752CDBF v1 SRMEMORYQT SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC14000070 1 en vsd IEC14000070 V1 EN US Figure ...

Page 463: ...RSETQT GUID 582D9F19 9974 40D6 95EB 7BAD72910748 v2 GUID 3830BCA7 4876 481E B5AC 2104675232E7 v5 The Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT has two outputs for delay of the input signal at pick up and drop out The timer has a settable time delay t It also has an Operation setting On Off that controls the operation of the timer When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is u...

Page 464: ...t signal pick up delayed OFF BOOLEAN Output signal drop out delayed 15 8 10 3 Settings PID 3816 SETTINGS v5 Table 326 TIMERSETQT Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled t 0 000 90000 000 s 0 001 0 000 Delay for settable timer n 15 8 10 4 Technical data GUID B6231B97 05ED 40E8 B735 1E1A50FDB85F v1 Table 327 ...

Page 465: ... XORQT can propagate the quality value and time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850 15 8 11 1 Function block GUID A685524C DF12 4BA8 A29C A027CEAC75E5 v2 XORQT INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT IEC09000300 1 en vsd IEC09000300 V1 EN US Figure 179 XORQT function block 15 8 11 2 Signals GUID 4543C4C9 FAE2 4328 8DE2 4A5756A020E9 v1 PID 3818 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 329 XORQT Input signals Name Type Default Descrip...

Page 466: ... of instances in the extension logic package Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms SLGAPC 10 10 54 VSGAPC 10 10 100 AND 40 40 100 OR 40 40 100 PULSETIMER 20 20 49 GATE 49 TIMERSET 30 30 49 XOR 10 10 69 LLD 49 SRMEMORY 10 10 110 INV 40 40 100 RSMEMORY 10 10 20 15 10 Fixed signals FXDSIGN 15 10 1 Identification SEMOD167904 2 v2 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ...

Page 467: ... 180 FXDSIGN function block 15 10 4 Signals PID 6191 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 333 FXDSIGN Output signals Name Type Description OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero STRNULL STRING String signal with no ...

Page 468: ...tring fixed to an empty string null value ZEROSMPL is a channel index fixed to 0 value GRP_OFF is a group signal fixed to 0 value 15 11 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I SEMOD175715 1 v1 15 11 1 Identification SEMOD175721 2 v2 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I 15 11 2 Functionality SEMOD175...

Page 469: ...n BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1...

Page 470: ...the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated OUT is an integer When all INx where 1 x 16 are activated that is Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT The B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally If the BLOCK input is activated it will freeze the output at the last value Values of each of...

Page 471: ...s 65535 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the B16I function block 15 11 8 Technical data GUID 65A2876A F779 41C4 ACD7 7662D1E7F1F2 v2 Table 337 Number of B16I instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms B16I 6 4 8 15 12 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175753 1 v4 15 12 1 Identification SEMOD...

Page 472: ...13000303 1 en vsd IEC13000303 V1 EN US Figure 182 BTIGAPC function block 15 12 4 Signals PID 6944 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 338 BTIGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 IN9 BOOLEAN 0 ...

Page 473: ...ination of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1 x 16 to an integer Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768 This follows the general formula INx 2x 1 where 1 x 16 The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated OUT is an integer When all INx where 1 x 16 are acti...

Page 474: ...N 0 Input 16 32768 0 The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx where 1 x 16 are active that is 1 is 65535 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block 15 12 8 Technical data GUID 3820F464 D296 4CAD 8491 F3F997359D79 v1 Table 341 Number of BTIGAPC instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms BTIGAPC 4 4...

Page 475: ...gure 183 IB16 function block 15 13 4 Signals PID 6938 INPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 342 IB16 Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input PID 6938 OUTPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 343 IB16 Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6...

Page 476: ...ue 8 The sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 2 4 8 15 This follows the general formulae The sum of the values of all OUTx 2x 1 where 1 x 16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function IB16 will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1 x 16 The sum of the values...

Page 477: ...BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0 OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0 OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0 OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0 OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0 The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx where x 1 to 16 are active that is 1 is 65535 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by the IB16 function block 15 13 7 Technical data GUID B45901F4 B163 4696 8220 7F8CA...

Page 478: ...C 61850 when the R L Remote Local push button on the front HMI indicates that the control mode for the operator is in position R Remote i e the LED adjacent to R is lit and the corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs...

Page 479: ... 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 15 14 5 Settings GUID F573CA16 4821 4203 970A F7D01AF5E63B v1 This function does not have any setting parameters 15 14 6 Operation principle SEMOD176587 4 v6 An example is used to explain the principle of operation With integer 15 sent to and received by the ITBGAPC function ...

Page 480: ...where 1 x 16 The values represented by the different OUTx are according to Table 347 When an OUTx is not activated its value is 0 The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer for example over IEC 61850 If the BLOCK input is activated it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value Table 347 Outputs and their values when activated Name of OUTx Type D...

Page 481: ...C4D53B0 v1 Table 348 Number of ITBGAPC instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms ITBGAPC 4 4 8 15 15 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC 15 15 1 Identification GUID 1913E066 37D1 4689 9178 5B3C8B029815 v3 Function Description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Elapsed time integrator TEIGA...

Page 482: ...ision of overflow Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds Retain the integration value Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time Report of the integrated time 15 15 3 Function block GUID 6D50A060 7751 405B AEC1 FAE942EBDA64 v2 TEIGAPC BLOCK IN RESET WARNING ALARM OVERFLOW ACCTIME IEC14000014 1 en vsd IEC14000014 V1 EN US Figure 18...

Page 483: ...grated elapsed time in seconds 15 15 5 Settings PID 6836 SETTINGS v2 Table 351 TEIGAPC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled tWarning 1 00 999999 00 s 0 01 600 00 Time limit for warning supervision tAlarm 1 00 999999 00 s 0 01 1200 00 Time limit for alarm supervision 15 15 6 Operation principle GUID 04CC8...

Page 484: ...applicable to long time integration 999 999 9 seconds output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory any retained value with a warning alarm overflow is used as initiation value for the integration following by a restart RESET Reset of the integration value Consequently all other outputs are also reset unconditionally on the input IN value re...

Page 485: ...5D4C v3 The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors function cycle time the pulse length the number of pulses that is the number of rising and falling flank pairs In principle a shorter function cycle time longer integrated time length or more pulses may lead to reduced accuracy 15 15 6 2 Memory storage GUID 6FDD6590 30F9 4CC1 AC9D 945544AB8688 v3 The value of the integrated elaps...

Page 486: ...r the level of integer values in the system relative to each other or to a fixed value It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for monitoring supervision interlocking and other logics 15 16 3 Function block GUID EB28F45B B1D0 452F 98B4 F96D7FA34069 v1 INTCOMP INPUT REF INEQUAL INHIGH INLOW IEC15000052 1 en vsdx IEC15000052 V1 EN US 15 16 4 Signals PID 6928 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 354 INTC...

Page 487: ... Set value for reference 15 16 6 Monitored data PID 6928 MONITOREDDATA v1 Table 357 INTCOMP Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value 15 16 7 Operation principle GUID E9C1B863 ACA7 45C0 91F1 A51FE38755FE v...

Page 488: ...n It will check the following condition and give corresponding outputs If the input is above the reference value then INHIGH is set HIGH If the input is below the reference value then INLOW is set HIGH If the input is equal to reference value then INEQUAL is set HIGH ABS INPUT REF INHIGH INEQUAL INLOW T F ABS EnaAbs RefSource SetValue a b a b a b a b a b b a IEC15000129 3 en vsdx T F T F IEC150001...

Page 489: ...er logics 15 17 3 Function block GUID 8752DF2A D131 4461 80C6 C52F9980D228 v1 REALCOMP INPUT REF INEQUAL INHIGH INLOW IEC15000053 1 en vsdx IEC15000053 V1 EN US 15 17 4 Signals PID 6897 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 359 REALCOMP Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT REAL 0 000 Input value to be compared with reference value REF REAL 0 000 Reference value to be compared with input value PID 689...

Page 490: ...rough setting RefSource If RefSource is selected as Input REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second input signal REF If RefSource is selected as Set Value then the reference value for comparison is taken from setting SetValue Generally the inputs to the function are in SI units but when the comparison is to be done with respect to set level then the user can set a value in a...

Page 491: ...lations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and high limit hysteresis has been provided If the INPUT is above the equal high level margin including hysteresis then INHIGH will set Similarly if the INPUT is below the equal low level margin including hysteresis then INLOW will set Internal Hysteresis for equal band Equal Band EqualBandHigh EqualBandLow REF or SetValue INEQUAL Reset INHIGH...

Page 492: ...5 17 7 Technical data GUID 62792FCB B436 4034 9A08 C9FF918FF547 v1 REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value level and the maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 µ GUID 3FDD7677 1D86 42AD A545 B66081C49B47 v3 Table 362 Number of REALCOMP instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms REALCOMP 10 10 10 Section 15 1MRK 511 408 UUS ...

Page 493: ...YMBOL RR V1 EN US Phase current measurement CMMXU I SYMBOL SS V1 EN US Phase phase voltage measurement VMMXU U SYMBOL UU V1 EN US Current sequence component measurement CMSQI I1 I2 I0 SYMBOL VV V1 EN US Voltage sequence component measurement VMSQI U1 U2 U0 SYMBOL TT V1 EN US Phase neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU U SYMBOL UU V1 EN US 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 16 Monitoring Phasor measurement un...

Page 494: ...rent protection function The available measured values from an IED are depending on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is low low limit low limit high limit and high high limit A zero clamping reduction is also supported that is the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which redu...

Page 495: ... class 0 5 presentation This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5 30 and 100 of rated current and at 100 of rated voltage The power system quantities provided depends on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities I sequence currents positive zero negative sequence magnitude and...

Page 496: ...00699 2 en vsd CMMXU I3P I_A IA_RANGE IA_ANGL I_B IB_RANGE IB_ANGL I_C IC_RANGE IC_ANGL ANSI05000699 V2 EN US Figure 192 CMMXU function block ANSI05000701 2 en vsd VMMXU V3P V_AB VAB_RANG VAB_ANGL V_BC VBC_RANG VBC_ANGL V_CA VCA_RANG VCA_ANGL ANSI05000701 V2 EN US Figure 193 VMMXU function block Section 16 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Monitoring 490 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 497: ...function block ANSI09000850 1 en vsd VNMMXU V3P V_A VA_RANGE VA_ANGL V_B VB_RANGE VB_ANGL V_C VC_RANGE VC_ANGL ANSI09000850 V1 EN US Figure 196 VNMMXU function block 16 1 4 Signals PID 6713 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 363 CVMMXN Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input V3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage input 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 16 Monitor...

Page 498: ...d voltage range I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range PID 6735 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 365 CMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input PID 6735 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 366 CMMXU Output signals Name Typ...

Page 499: ...tude value VBC_RANG INTEGER VBC Magnitude range VBC_ANGL REAL VBC Angle magnitude of reported value VCA REAL VCA Reported magnitude value VCA_RANG INTEGER VCA Magnitude range VCA_ANGL REAL VCA Angle magnitude of reported value PID 6736 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 369 CMSQI Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input PID 6736 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 370 CMSQ...

Page 500: ... 372 VMSQI Output signals Name Type Description 3V0 REAL 3V0 Reported magnitude value 3V0RANG INTEGER 3V0 Magnitude range 3V0ANGL REAL 3V0 Magnitude angle V1 REAL V1 Reported magnitude value V1RANG INTEGER V1 Magnitude range V1ANGL REAL V1 Magnitude angle V2 REAL V2 Reported magnitude value V2RANG INTEGER V2 Magnitude range V2ANGL REAL V2 Magnitude angle PID 6737 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 373 VNMMXU I...

Page 501: ...in the first setting group The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns VBase VB Base voltage in primary kV This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised object IBase IB Base current in primary A This current is used as reference for current setting It can be suitable to set this parameter ...

Page 502: ... 000 Minimum value PFMax 1 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 Maximum value PFRepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type VMin 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of VBase VMax 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of VBase VRepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type IMin 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 5 0 M...

Page 503: ...eport interval s Db In 0 001 of range Int Db In 0 001 s SZeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in 0 001 of range SHiHiLim 0 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of SBase SHiLim 0 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of SBase SLimHyst 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits PDbRepInt 1 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In 0 001 of ...

Page 504: ...yst 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits VDbRepInt 1 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In 0 001 of range Int Db In 0 001 s VZeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in 0 001 of range VHiHiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of UBase VHiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of VBase VLowLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 80 0 Low limit...

Page 505: ...librate voltage at 100 of Vn IMagComp5 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5 of In IMagComp30 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30 of In IMagComp100 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100 of In IAngComp5 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Angle calibration for current at 5 of In IAngComp30 10 000 10 000 Deg ...

Page 506: ...in of IBase IC_RepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type IC_AngDbRepInt 1 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval s Table 378 CMMXU Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description IA_ZeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in 0 001 of range IA_HiHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of IBa...

Page 507: ...0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of IBase IC_HiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of IBase IC_LowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of IBase IC_LowLowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of IBase IC_LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits PID 6738 SETTINGS v2 Table 379 VMMXU Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step De...

Page 508: ...se VCA_RepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type VCAAngDbRepInt 1 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval s Table 380 VMMXU Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description VAB_HiHiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of UBase VAB_HiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of VBase VAB_LowLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 ...

Page 509: ...Minimum value in of IBase 3I0Max 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of IBase 3I0RepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 3I0LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits 3I0AngDbRepInt 1 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval s ...

Page 510: ... Default Description 3I0HiHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of IBase 3I0HiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of IBase 3I0LowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of IBase 3I0LowLowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of IBase I1HiHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of IBase I1HiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of IBase I1LowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 80 0 L...

Page 511: ...led Enabled operation V1DbRepInt 1 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In 0 001 of range Int Db In 0 001 s V1ZeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in 0 001 of range V1Min 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of VBase V1Max 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of VBase V1RepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting typ...

Page 512: ... Low limit in of VBase 3V0LowLowLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of VBase V1HiHiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of UBase V1HiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of VBase V1LowLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of VBase V1LowLowLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of VBase V2HiHiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of UBase V2HiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 12...

Page 513: ...0 0 VB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of VBase VB_RepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type VB_LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits VBAngDbRepInt 1 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval s VC_DbRepInt 1 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In 0 001 of range Int Db In 0 001 s VC_ZeroDb 0 100000 ...

Page 514: ...of VBase VC_HiHiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of UBase VC_HiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of VBase VC_LowLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of VBase VC_LowLowLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of VBase 16 1 6 Monitored data PID 6713 MONITOREDDATA v3 Table 387 CVMMXN Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description S REAL MVA Apparent Power magnitude of ...

Page 515: ... Range Unit Description VAB REAL kV VAB Reported magnitude value VAB_ANGL REAL deg VAB Angle magnitude of reported value VBC REAL kV VBC Reported magnitude value VBC_ANGL REAL deg VBC Angle magnitude of reported value VCA REAL kV VCA Reported magnitude value VCA_ANGL REAL deg VCA Angle magnitude of reported value PID 6736 MONITOREDDATA v3 Table 390 CMSQI Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit ...

Page 516: ...ble 392 VNMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description VA REAL kV VA Amplitude magnitude of reported value VA_ANGL REAL deg VA Angle magnitude of reported value VB REAL kV VB Amplitude magnitude of reported value VB_ANGL REAL deg VB Angle magnitude of reported value VC REAL kV VC Amplitude magnitude of reported value VC_ANGL REAL deg V_C Angle magnitude of reported value 16 1 7 Oper...

Page 517: ...zero point clamping limit is a general setting XZeroDb where X equals S P Q PF V I F IA IB IC VA VB VC VAB VBC VCA I1 I2 3I0 V1 V2 or 3V0 Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the measurement values within CVMMXN Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417 140 v5 Users can continuously monitor the measure...

Page 518: ...etween the operating and reset value at each operating point in wide range for each measuring channel separately The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417 150 v4 The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely The measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately but the reporting ...

Page 519: ... value for t XDbRepInt t t t t IEC05000500 V2 EN US Figure 198 Periodic reporting Magnitude dead band supervision SEMOD54417 163 v6 If a measuring value is changed compared to the last reported value and the change is larger than the ΔY pre defined limits that are set by user XDbRepInt then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level This limits the information flow to a minimum ...

Page 520: ...mplified the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other The last value reported Y1 in figure 200 serves as a basic value for further measurement A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment discrete integral The absolute values of these integral value...

Page 521: ...A 4A38 BC9D 29538491254D v1 In this mode of operation the reporting interval will be cyclic like in reporting type cyclic This cyclic time has three options 5sec 30 sec and 1 min Additionally if a measuring value has changed from the last reported value and the change is larger than ΔY predefined limits that are set by user XDbRepInt then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher lev...

Page 522: ... 16 1 7 2 Measurements CVMMXN SEMOD54417 172 v3 Mode of operation SEMOD54417 174 v7 The measurement function must be connected to three phase current and three phase voltage input in the configuration tool group signals but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED The end user can freely selec...

Page 523: ...S Equation 68 3 PosSeq PosSeq V V I I EQUATION1566 V1 EN US Equation 69 Used when only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured 4 AB AB A B S V I I EQUATION1567 V1 EN US Equation 70 2 AB A B V V I I I EQUATION1568 V1 EN US Equation 71 Used when only VAB phase to phase voltage is available 5 BC BC B C S V I I EQUATION1569 V1 EN US Equation 72 2 BC B C V V I I I EQUATION1570 V1 EN US Equation...

Page 524: ...rom 3 to 9 it calculates the three phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P Q S PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas Re P S EQUATION1403 V1 EN US Equation 82 Im Q S EQUATION1404 V1 EN US Equation 83 2 2 S S P Q EQUATION1405 V1 EN US Equation 84 cos P PF S j EQUATION1406 V1 EN US Equation ...

Page 525: ...sured current of In 0 5 Constant 5 30 100 Linear 100 Constant 100 30 5 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100 10 10 Angle compensation Degrees Measured current of In ANSI05000652_3_en vsd ANSI05000652 V3 EN US Figure 202 Calibration curves The first current and voltage phase signal in the group signals will be used as reference The magnitude and angle compensation will be used for other related input si...

Page 526: ...lues for power P Q and S and power factor are forced to zero as well Since the measurement supervision functionality included in CVMMXN is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision see section Measurement supervision Compensation facility SEMOD54417 253 v5 In order to compensate fo...

Page 527: ...nt point of view to have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180 0 degrees With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar Frequency SEMOD54417 261 v2 Frequency is actually not calculated within...

Page 528: ...ent supervision 16 1 7 5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI CMSQI SEMOD54417 299 v6 The measurement functions must be connected to three phase current CMSQI or voltage VMSQI input in the configuration tool to be operable No outputs other than X_RANG are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals Input signals are obtained from the pre proces...

Page 529: ... 0 x In 0 02 100 to 220 V 0 5 2 0 x In 0 01 GUID 5E04B3F9 E1B7 4974 9C0B DE9CD4A2408F v6 Table 394 CMMXU technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Current at symmetrical load 0 1 4 0 In 0 3 of In at I 0 5 In 0 3 of I at I 0 5 In Phase angle at symmetrical load 0 1 4 0 In 1 0 degrees at 0 1 In I 0 5 In 0 5 degrees at 0 5 In I 4 0 In GUID 374C2AF0 D647 4159 8D3A 71190FE3CFE0 v5 Table 395 VMMXU...

Page 530: ...t V 50 V 0 2 of V at V 50 V Voltage zero sequence 3V0 10 to 300 V 0 5 of V at V 50 V 0 2 of V at V 50 V Voltage negative sequence V2 10 to 300 V 0 5 of V at V 50 V 0 2 of V at V 50 V Phase angle 10 to 300 V 0 5 degrees at V 50 V 0 2 degrees at V 50 V GUID ED634B6D 9918 464F B6A4 51B78129B819 v6 Table 398 VNMMXU technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage 5 to 175 V 0 5 of V at V 50 V 0...

Page 531: ...M PRESSURE TEMP ANSI09000129 2 en vsdx ANSI09000129 V2 EN US Figure 204 SSIMG 63 function block 16 2 4 Signals GUID 89749F71 CAEB 4A57 A1F0 148CCF68E97E v2 PID 6950 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 399 SSIMG Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms SENPRES REAL 0 0 Pressure input from CB SENTEMP REAL 0 0 Temperature of the insulation ...

Page 532: ...imit 1 00 100 00 0 01 3 00 Pressure lockout setting TempAlarmLimit 40 00 200 00 0 01 30 00 Temperature alarm level setting of the medium TempLOLimit 40 00 200 00 0 01 30 00 Temperature lockout level of the medium tPressureAlarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay for pressure alarm tPressureLO 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay for pressure lockout indication tTempAlarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0...

Page 533: ... input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout PRESLO The PRESLO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO The binary input BLKALM can be used to block the alarms and the BLOCK input can block both alarm and the lockout indications Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature The signal is monitored to detect high temperat...

Page 534: ...lockout level 40 00 200 00 2 5 of set value Time delay for pressure alarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 250ms whichever is greater Reset time delay for pressure alarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 250ms whichever is greater Time delay for pressure lockout 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 250ms whichever is greater Time delay for temperature alarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 250ms whichever is greater Reset time delay for temperat...

Page 535: ...EMPALM LEVEL TEMP ANSI09000128 2 en vsdx ANSI09000128 V2 EN US Figure 205 SSIML 71 function block 16 3 4 Signals GUID 0C378BB3 2104 417F 94B5 16EFC55151FE v2 PID 6951 INPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 404 SSIML Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms SENLEVEL REAL 0 0 Level input from CB SENTEMP REAL 0 0 Temperature of the insulation ...

Page 536: ...t 1 00 100 00 0 01 3 00 Level lockout setting TempAlarmLimit 40 00 200 00 0 01 30 00 Temperature alarm level setting of the medium TempLOLimit 40 00 200 00 0 01 30 00 Temperature lockout level of the medium tLevelAlarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay for level alarm tLevelLockOut 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay for level lockout indication tTempAlarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time del...

Page 537: ...alarm LVLALM or lockout LVLLO will be initiated The SETLLO binary input is used for setting the liquid level lockout LVLLO The LVLLO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO The binary input BLKALM can be used for blocking the alarms and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication Temperature of the medium is available from the input si...

Page 538: ...10 0 of set value Temperature alarm level 40 00 200 00 2 5 of set value Temperature lockout level 40 00 200 00 2 5 of set value Time delay for oil alarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 250ms whichever is greater Reset time delay for oil alarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 250ms whichever is greater Time delay for oil lockout 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 250ms whichever is greater Time delay for temperature alarm 0 000 60 ...

Page 539: ...L TRVTCLAL OPERALM OPERLO CBLIFEAL MONALM IPOWALPH IPOWLOPH SPCHALM GPRESALM GPRESLO ANSI14000061 1 en vsd ANSI14000061 V1 EN US Figure 206 SSCBR function block 16 4 4 Signals PID 3267 INPUTSIGNALS v10 Table 409 SSCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the ...

Page 540: ...s exceeds lockout limit CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level MONALM BOOLEAN CB not operated for long time alarm IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time exceeds alarm limit IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time exceeds lockout limit SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value GPRESALM BOOLE...

Page 541: ...500 00 Lockout level for accumulated I CurrExponent integrated over CB open travel time SpChAlmTime 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 1 00 Alarm level for spring charging time InitCBRemLife 1 99999 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life estimates InactiveAlDays 0 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter Table 412 SSCBR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Open...

Page 542: ...cle CBLIFEPH INTEGER CB Remaining life of respective phase INADAYS INTEGER The number of days CB has been inactive IPOWPH REAL Accumulated I CurrExponent integrated over CB open travel time SPCHT REAL s The charging time of the CB spring 16 4 7 Operation principle GUID 3902D69C 1858 40DD AD63 C33C381697BA v12 The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions The subfunc...

Page 543: ...POWPH TRIND OPENPOS CLOSEPOS INVDPOS CB Status CB Operation Monitoring CB Operation Cycles Accumulated energy Remaining Life of CB RSTCBWR IPOWLOPH IPOWALPH MONALM INADAYS PRESALM PRESLO GPRESALM GPRESLO SPCHALM SPCHT RSTSPCHT CB Spring Charge Monitoring RSTIPOW TRCMD IEC12000624 3 en vsd 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 16 Monitoring Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 537 Technical manual ...

Page 544: ... EN US Figure 208 Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time Contact travel time calculation The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of change of auxiliary contacts The opening travel time is measured between the opening of the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts Similarly the closing travel time is measured bet...

Page 545: ... closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr t3 t4 setting to the measured closing time The last measured opening travel time TTRVOP and the closing travel time TTRVCL are given as service values The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input RSTCBWR Alarm limit check When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value s...

Page 546: ...osed when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS CLOSEPOS and INVDPOS for open closed and error positi...

Page 547: ...the breaker can perform at the rated current The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated fault current Alarm limit check When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel setting the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input BLKALM The old ci...

Page 548: ...t opens If the setting is positive the calculation of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the ContTrCorr setting has passed When the setting is negative the calculation starts in advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened Main Contact close open POSCLOSE 1 0 Energy Accumulation starts ContTrCorr Negative Main...

Page 549: ... counts the number of closing opening sequences of the breaker The operation counter value is updated after each closing opening sequence The operation is described in figure214 POSCLOSE POSOPEN RSTCBWR BLOCK BLKALM Operation counter Alarm limit Check NOOPER OPERALM OPERLO IEC12000617 V2 EN US Figure 214 Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles Operation counter The operation...

Page 550: ...onal module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring Inactive timer The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained in the same open or closed state The value is calculated by monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value The initial number of inactive days is...

Page 551: ...ircuit breaker spring is charged The spring charging time is calculated from the difference of these two signal timings Spring charging indication is described in figure 216 The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value The spring charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input RSTSPCHT Alarm limit check If the time taken by the spring to charg...

Page 552: ... input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers The alarm signals from the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM 16 4 8 Technical data GUID B6799420 D726 460E B02F C7D4F1937432 v8 Table 414 SSCBR Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Alarm level for open and close travel time 0 200 ms 3 ms Alarm level for number of operations 0 9999 Independent time dela...

Page 553: ... level These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function EVENT The EVENT function block is used for remote communication Analog integer and double indication values are also transferred through the EVENT function 16 5 3 Function block SEMOD116030 4 v2 IEC05000697 2 en vsd EVENT BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 ...

Page 554: ...UT5 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 5 INPUT6 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 6 INPUT7 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 7 INPUT8 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 8 INPUT9 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 9 INPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 10 INPUT11 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 11 INPUT12 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 12 INPUT13 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 13 INPUT14 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 14 INPUT15 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 15 INPUT16 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 16 Section 16 1MRK 511 408 UUS A...

Page 555: ...Detect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2 EventMask3 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3 EventMask4 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4 EventMask5 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5 EventMask6 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetec...

Page 556: ...Detect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 13 EventMask14 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 14 EventMask15 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15 EventMask16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16 MinRepIntVal1 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval in...

Page 557: ... to create single events but are also intended for double indication events For double indications only the first eight inputs 1 8 must be used Inputs 9 16 can be used for other types of events in the same EVENT block The EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events Events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input chann...

Page 558: ...or each input channel To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the EVENT function or the communication subsystems behind it a quota limiter is implemented If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumu...

Page 559: ...of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder All connected signals from pickup of pre fault time to the end of post fault time will be included in the recording Disturbance record will have visible settings from all function instances that are configured in the application configuration tool Every disturbance report recording is saved in the...

Page 560: ...3 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 IEC05000431 V3 EN US Figure 221 A4RADR function block derived analog inputs SEMOD54845 4 v6 IEC05000432 3 en vsd B1RBDR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 IEC05000432 V3 EN US Figure 222 B1RBDR function block binary inputs example for B1RBDR B22RBDR Section ...

Page 561: ...GNAL Group signal for input 3 GRPINPUT4 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 4 GRPINPUT5 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 5 GRPINPUT6 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 6 GRPINPUT7 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 7 GRPINPUT8 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 8 GRPINPUT9 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 9 GRPINPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 10 GUID D025D5D9 A0F3 4A00 891A 63A...

Page 562: ...annel 40 PID 3798 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 420 B1RBDR Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9...

Page 563: ...7RBDR INPUT257 to INPUT272 binary channels 257 to 272 B18RBDR INPUT273 to INPUT288 binary channels 273 to 288 B19RBDR INPUT289 to INPUT304 binary channels 289 to 304 B20RBDR INPUT305 to INPUT320 binary channels 305 to 320 B21RBDR INPUT321 to INPUT336 binary channels 321 to 336 B22RBDR INPUT337 to INPUT352 binary channels 337 to 352 16 6 5 Settings PID 7068 SETTINGS v1 Table 421 DRPRDRE Non group s...

Page 564: ...01 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 1 UnderTrigOp01 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 1 on or not off UnderTrigLe01 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in of signal OverTrigOp01 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 1 on or not off OverTrigLe01 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 ...

Page 565: ...nder level trigger for analog channel 5 on or not off UnderTrigLe05 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5 in of signal OverTrigOp05 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 5 on or not off OverTrigLe05 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in of signal NomValue06 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 6 UnderTrigOp06 Disabled E...

Page 566: ...for analog channel 9 in of signal NomValue10 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 10 UnderTrigOp10 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 10 on or not off UnderTrigLe10 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10 in of signal OverTrigOp10 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 10 on or not off OverTrigLe10 0 5000 ...

Page 567: ...led Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED04 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4 TrigDR05 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED05 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5 TrigDR06 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED06 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip Disabl...

Page 568: ...rigDR12 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED12 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12 TrigDR13 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED13 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13 TrigDR14 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED14 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup ...

Page 569: ...5 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType6 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo6 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType7 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo7 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType8 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary ch...

Page 570: ...channel 16 IEC 60870 5 103 Table 425 B1RBDR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 1 IndicationMa01 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 1 TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 2 Indicat...

Page 571: ...binary channel 10 TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 11 IndicationMa11 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 11 TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 12 IndicationMa12 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 12 TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig o...

Page 572: ... SetLED305 set LED on HMI for binary channel 305 B21RBDR 321 to 336 SetLED321 set LED on HMI for binary channel 321 B22RBDR 337 to 352 SetLED337 set LED on HMI for binary channel 337 B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings advanced as B1RBDR but with different numbering examples given in brackets B2RBDR 17 to 32 IndicationMa17 indication mask for binary channel 17 B3RBDR 33 to...

Page 573: ...og channel 2 activated UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 3 activated OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 3 activated UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 4 activated OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 4 activated UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 5 activated OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN Over le...

Page 574: ...LEAN Under level trig for analog channel 14 activated OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 14 activated UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 15 activated OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 15 activated UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 16 activated OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 16...

Page 575: ...OOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 25 activated OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 25 activated UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 26 activated OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 26 activated UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 27 activated OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel ...

Page 576: ...Over level trig for analog channel 35 activated UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 36 activated OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 36 activated UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 37 activated OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 37 activated UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 38 acti...

Page 577: ... TVR Disturbance recorder DR Settings information Figure 223 shows the relations between Disturbance Report included functions and function blocks Sequential of events SOE Event recorder ER and Indications IND uses information from the binary input function blocks BxRBDR Trip value recorder TVR uses analog information from the analog input function blocks AxRADR Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquir...

Page 578: ...T runtime status and IEC61850 behavior that is added to the disturbance record header file These settings information is recorded in XML format and then grouped for each function instance in the HDR file The function setting names and Enum values are same as in the HMI and can be translated to the selected HMI language All setting values are updated along with the units If the setting values are r...

Page 579: ... and recording time and settings information Figure 225 shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested for a typical configuration that is in a 60 Hz system it is possible to record 80 where the average recording time is 3 4 seconds The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report Event list EL Event recorder ER Indications IND and Trip value recorder TVR ...

Page 580: ...rder may contain a list of up to 150 time tagged events which have occurred during the disturbance The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600 Sequential of events SOE M12155 177 v6 The sequetial of events may contain a list of totally 1000 time tagged events The list information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state The oldest data is overwritten The logge...

Page 581: ...on are listed as a child tag Set with contents name value and unit name parameter name same as HMI value actual parameter value unit parameter unit The changed_settings attribute tag is similar to the settings section It contains functions which have changes in parameter value or runtime status or IEC61850 behavior when compared with trigger and post processing settings values Time tagging M12155 ...

Page 582: ...g was triggered The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time Analog signals M12155 160 v8 Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance ...

Page 583: ...rbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool SMT external signal configuration In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used The preproc...

Page 584: ... block is included in the configuration the signal is connected to the input of the function block Each of the 352 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report Operation Operation TrigDR Enabled A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI SetLED Enabled The selected signals are presented in the event recorder sequential of events and the disturbance r...

Page 585: ...is calculated If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger this trigger is indicated with a greater than sign with the user defined name If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger this trigger is indicated with a less than sign with its name The procedure is separately performed for each channel T...

Page 586: ...rdings at 60 Hz Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1 2 kHz at 60 Hz Recording bandwidth 5 300 Hz 16 7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP GUID E7A2DB38 DD96 4296 B3D5 EB7FBE77CE07 v2 16 7 1 Identification GUID E0247779 27A2 4E6C A6DD D4C31516CA5C v3 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Logical signal status report BINSTATREP 16 7 2 Func...

Page 587: ...NPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status r...

Page 588: ...tatus report output 13 OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14 OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15 OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16 16 7 5 Settings PID 4144 SETTINGS v6 Table 430 BINSTATREP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description t 0 0 60 0 s 0 1 10 0 Time delay of function 16 7 6 Operation principle GUID 537921CA 82B9 4A02 BAD...

Page 589: ...nctions CMSQI and VMSQI and IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions MVGAPC are provided with measurement supervision functionality All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits low low limit low limit high limit and high high limit The measure value expander block RANGE_XP has been introduced to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 ...

Page 590: ...bove high high limit HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high high limit NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low low limit LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low low limit 16 8 5 Operation principle SEMOD52462 4 v5 The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block CVMMXN CMMXU VMM...

Page 591: ...ndent limits where the number of positive and or negative sides on the input signal are counted against the setting values for limits The output for each limit is activated when the counted value reaches that limit Overflow indication is included for each up counter 16 9 3 Operation principle GUID 4D58423F 329C 4553 9FAF E55A368849A5 v2 Limit counter L4UFCNT counts the number of positive and or ne...

Page 592: ...ble non zero value after reset of the function The function has also a maximum counted value check The three possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next...

Page 593: ... remain in their previous states However the counter can be initialized after reset of the function In this case the outputs remain in their initial states until the release of the block input 16 9 3 2 Reporting GUID 7DF874A7 F7DA 48DD 8760 5E4CF05FD870 v1 The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input Reading ...

Page 594: ...mit4 VALUE INTEGER Counted value 16 9 6 Settings PID 6966 SETTINGS v2 Table 436 L4UFCNT Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled On Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled CountType Positive edge Negative edge Both edges Positive edge Select counting on positive and or negative sides CounterLimit1 1 65535 1 100 Value of the first limit CounterLimit2 1 655...

Page 595: ... 16 10 Running hour meter TEILGAPC 16 10 1 Identification GUID 3F9EF4FA 74FA 4D1D 88A0 E948B722B64F v1 Function Description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Running hour meter TEILGAPC 16 10 2 Functionality GUID 464FB24F B367 446C 963A A14841943B87 v2 The Running hour meter TEILGAPC function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time when a given...

Page 596: ...nd rollover overflow Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the resolution of 0 1 hours Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart Possibilities for blocking and reset Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time Reporting of the accumulated time 16 10 3 Function block GUID D0E9688B C9D9 44B7 BD95 81132CCA5E4F v1 TEILGAPC BLOCK IN ADDTIME RESET ALARM WARNING OVERFLOW ACC_HOUR ...

Page 597: ...OW BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached overflow limit ACC_HOUR REAL Accumulated time in hours ACC_DAY REAL Accumulated time in days 16 10 5 Settings PID 6998 SETTINGS v1 Table 441 TEILGAPC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled tAlarm 1 0 99999 9 Hour 0 1 90000 0 Time limit for alarm superv...

Page 598: ... value in days accumulated value is retained in a non volatile memory any retained value is used as initiation value for the integration following by a restart RESET Reset of the accumulated value Consequently all other outputs are also reset independent of the input IN value reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero Note that the nonvolatile memory will not reset to zero if the input IN i...

Page 599: ...ser settable time parameter in hours tAlarm tWarning and tAddToTime are possible to be defined with a resolution of 0 1 hours 6 minutes The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999 9 hours The outputs will reset and the accumulated time will reset and pickup from zero if an overflow occurs 16 10 6 1 Operation accuracy GUID B6FBEFD7 17C8 41C6 B5D5 32E1205E6752 v1 The accuracy of TEILGAP...

Page 600: ...C 9830 A2362FD289F2 v1 Table 442 TEILGAPC Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Time limit for alarm supervision tAlarm 0 99999 9 hours 0 1 of set value Time limit for warning supervision tWarning 0 99999 9 hours 0 1 of set value Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999 9 hours 0 1 Section 16 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Monitoring 594 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical ma...

Page 601: ...y meter for calculation of energy consumption values The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT function A scaled service value is available over the station bus The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality 17 1 3 Function block M13400 3 v5 PCFCNT BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT INVALID RE...

Page 602: ...AL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information 17 1 5 Settings PID 6509 SETTINGS v4 Table 445 PCFCNT Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled EventMask NoEvents ReportEvents NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse counter CountCriteria Disabled RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange Rising...

Page 603: ...e counter uses a 32 bit format that is the reported value is a 32 bit signed integer with a range 0 2147483647 The counter is reset at initialization of the IED The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity Scaled Value pulse count x scale Time and Pulse Counter Quality The Pulse Counter Quality consists of Invalid board hardware error or configuration error Wrapped arou...

Page 604: ...READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank The signal must be a pulse with a length 1 second The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module BIM The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter Each pulse counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recor...

Page 605: ...meter Scale time and status information 17 1 8 Technical data IP14092 1 v1 M13404 2 v5 Table 447 PCFCNT technical data Function Setting range Accuracy Input frequency See Binary Input Module BIM Cycle time for report of counter value 1 3600 s 17 2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR SEMOD153638 1 v2 17 2 1 Identification SEMOD175537 2 v4 Function description IEC 61850 ident...

Page 606: ...over a selected time tEnergy The integration of active and reactive energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions These energy values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs STARTACC and STOPACC and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC input The maximum demand for active and re...

Page 607: ...ve energy pulse EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value EARACC REAL Accumulated ...

Page 608: ...tive forward accumulated energy value ERRAccPlsQty 0 001 10000 000 MVArh 0 001 100 000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse accumulated energy value Table 451 ETPMMTR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description EALim 0 001 10000000000 000 MWh 0 001 1000000 000 Active energy limit ERLim 0 001 10000000000 000 MVArh 0 001 1000 000 Reactive energy limit EnZeroClamp Disab...

Page 609: ...lue ERRACC REAL MVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy value MAXPAFD REAL MW Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval MAXPARD REAL MW Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval MAXPRFD REAL MVAr Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval MAXPRRD REAL MVAr Maximum reverse reactive power demand value for set interval 17 2 7 Operation principle G...

Page 610: ...he RSTACC input is in the active state the output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled ACCINPRG is deactivated by activating the STOPACC input T F STARTACC ACCINPRG RSTACC 1 q 1 STOPACC FALSE EnaAcc IEC13000186 4 en vsd q 1 unit delay IEC13000186 V4 EN US Figure 241 ACCINPRG Logic diagram The accumulated energy values in MWh and MVArh are available as service values and als...

Page 611: ...ccPlsQty setting The accumulated energy values are divided by the energy per pulse value to get the number of pulses The number of pulses can be reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu The pulse on and off time duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls Figure 243 shows the logic for pulse output generation for the integrated energy in the ...

Page 612: ... reverse direction When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset menu these outputs are reset to zero The energy alarm is activated once the periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim Figure 244 shows the logic of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active power demand value Similarly the maximum power calculation and energy alarm outputs in the a...

Page 613: ...F35 8C69 FFAA951FE374 v1 Table 453 Function Range or value Accuracy Energy metering MWh Export Import MVarh Export Import Input from MMXU No extra error at steady load 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 17 Metering Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 607 Technical manual ...

Page 614: ...608 ...

Page 615: ...ss points non redundant left and redundant communication right DHCP is available for the front port and a device connected to it can thereby obtain an automatically assigned IP address 18 1 2 Settings PID 6775 SETTINGS v4 Table 454 AP_1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation on off of the access point Redundancy None P...

Page 616: ...TCP server C37 118UDP1 Disabled Enabled Enabled IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server C37 118UDP2 Disabled Enabled Enabled IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server C37 118UDP3 Disabled Enabled Enabled IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server C37 118UDP4 Disabled Enabled Enabled IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server C...

Page 617: ...P server C37 118UDP1 Disabled Enabled Enabled IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server C37 118UDP2 Disabled Enabled Enabled IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server C37 118UDP3 Disabled Enabled Enabled IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server C37 118UDP4 Disabled Enabled Enabled IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server C37...

Page 618: ...vice 18 2 2 Function block GUID 727BF536 1D60 4060 A674 5D73F252CCB7 v1 SCHLCCH LINKUP DOSALARM IEC16000044 1 en vsdx IEC16000044 V1 EN US Figure 246 SCHLCCH Function block RCHLCCH REDLINKA REDLINKB DOSALARM IEC16000045 1 en vsdx IEC16000045 V1 EN US Figure 247 RCHLCCH Function block FRONTSTATUS LINKUP DOSALARM IEC16000085 1 en vsdx IEC16000085 V1 EN US Figure 248 FRONTSTATUS Function block 18 2 3...

Page 619: ...2 Table 460 SCHLCCH Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description GatewayConfig INTEGER 0 Ok 1 Error 1 Off 2 Invalid Gateway configuration status PID 6819 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 461 RCHLCCH Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description GatewayConfig INTEGER 0 Ok 1 Error 1 Off 2 Invalid Gateway configuration status PID 6813 MONITOREDDATA v4 Table 462 FRONTSTATUS Monitored data Nam...

Page 620: ...on according to IEC 62439 3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439 3 Edition 2 High availability seamless redundancy HSR is available as an option when ordering IEDs Redundant station bus communication according to 62439 3 uses two optical Ethernet ports 18 3 3 Operation principle GUID 73DB23CD A924 4B89 8AAB 1E79D44DE429 v1 PRP IEC 62439 3 redundant communication The communication is performed in parallel that ...

Page 621: ...ns over the ring Every node forwards the frames it receives from one port to another to reach the next node When the originating sender node receives the frame it sent the sender node discards the frame to avoid loops The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels If no data package has been received on one or both channels within the last 10 s the output Link...

Page 622: ...es in digital format commonly known as Merging Units MU The rear access points are used for the communication The merging units MU are called so because they can gather analog values from one or more measuring transformers sample the data and send the data over process bus to other clients or subscribers in the system Some merging units are able to get data from classical measuring transformers ot...

Page 623: ...bject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTStarPoint4 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite 18 4 3 Monitored data PID 6850 MONITOREDDATA v3 Table 465 MU1_HW Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description MUDATA BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Fatal error data not received transmission errors time sync issues or inconsistent sampl...

Page 624: ...scillatory indication output for I1 OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange indication output for I1 Overflow BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Overflow indication output for I1 Source BOOLEAN 0 Process 1 Substituted Source indication output for I1 Test BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Test indication output for I1 Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionable Validity indication output I1 BadReference BOOLEAN ...

Page 625: ...tion output for I3 Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inaccurate indication output for I3 Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inconsistent indication output for I3 OldData BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OldData indication output for I3 OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OperatorBlocked indication output for I3 Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Oscillatory indication output for I3 OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange ...

Page 626: ...Yes 0 No Test indication output for I4 Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionable Validity indication output I4 BadReference BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No BadReference indication output for VA Derived BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Derived indication output for VA Failure BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Failure indication output for VA Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inaccurate indication output for VA Inconsistent BO...

Page 627: ...d indication output for VB Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Oscillatory indication output for VB OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange indication output for VB Overflow BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Overflow indication output for VB Source BOOLEAN 0 Process 1 Substituted Source indication output for VB Test BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Test indication output for VB Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Quest...

Page 628: ...Derived indication output for 3V0 Failure BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Failure indication output for 3V0 Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inaccurate indication output for 3V0 Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inconsistent indication output for 3V0 OldData BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OldData indication output for 3V0 OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OperatorBlocked indication output for 3V0 Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 N...

Page 629: ...5 V1 EN US Figure 251 Route from source to destination through gateway 18 5 2 Settings PID 6761 SETTINGS v2 Table 466 ROUTE_1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation enable disable of the route IPAddress 0 18 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 IP address of the gateway DestIPAddress 0 18 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Destination IP address De...

Page 630: ...TA v2 Table 467 ROUTE_1 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description RouteConfig INTEGER 0 Ok 1 Error 1 Off Route configuration status Section 18 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Ethernet 624 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 631: ...munication protocol DNP 3 0 communication protocol C37 118 communication protocol Several protocols can be combined in the same IED 19 2 Communication protocol diagnostics GUID 6BC4671F 6D06 4BBD B1FF 2F03FF16A856 v1 Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu Diagnostics IED status Protocol diagnostics The diagnostic values are Diagnostic value Description Off Protocol is tu...

Page 632: ...P14616 1 v2 19 4 1 Functionality M14787 3 v15 IEC 61850 Ed 1 or Ed 2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600 The IED is equipped with up to six order dependent optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850 8 1 station bus communication The IEC 61850 8 1 communication is also possible from the electrical Ethernet front port IEC 61850 8 1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices IEDs from different v...

Page 633: ...d When double Ethernet ports are activated make sure that all ports are connected to different subnets For example port 1 has IP address 198 168 101 10 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 and port 2 has IP address 198 168 102 10 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 19 4 3 Settings PID 6702 SETTINGS v3 Table 469 IEC61850 8 1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Di...

Page 634: ...BASE FX Protocol IEC 60870 5 103 Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd Protocol DNP3 0 Communication speed for the IEDs 300 115200 Bd Protocol TCP IP Ethernet Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit s Protocol LON Communication speed for the IEDs 1 25 Mbit s Protocol SPA Communication speed for the IEDs 300 38400 Bd 19 4 5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication SP...

Page 635: ...TSIGNALS v6 Table 471 SPGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status PID 3781 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 472 SP16GAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status ...

Page 636: ...rs available in the local HMI or PCM600 19 4 5 5 Monitored data PID 3780 MONITOREDDATA v3 Table 473 SPGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description OUT GROUP SIGNAL Output status PID 3781 MONITOREDDATA v3 Table 474 SP16GAPC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description OUT1 GROUP SIGNAL Output 1 status OUT2 GROUP SIGNAL Output 2 status OUT3 GROUP SIGNAL Output 3 status OUT4 ...

Page 637: ...PC function sends the signal over IEC 61850 8 1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the IEC 61850 8 1 communication established For more information refer to the Engineering manual 19 4 6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC SEMOD55402 1 v3 19 4 6 1 Functionality SEMOD55872 5 v10 Generic communicat...

Page 638: ... 6753 SETTINGS v1 Table 477 MVGAPC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description BasePrefix micro milli unit kilo Mega Giga Tera unit Base prefix multiplication factor MV db 1 100000 Type 1 10000 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s MV zeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Zero point clamping in 0 001 of range MV hhLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 900 00 High High limit ...

Page 639: ...ys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits 19 4 6 5 Monitored data PID 6753 MONITOREDDATA v1 Table 478 MVGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value RANGE INTEGER 1 High 2 Low 3 High High 4 Low Low 0 Normal Range 19 4 6 6 Operation principle SEMOD55936 5 v7 Upon receiving an analog signal at its input Gener...

Page 640: ...OUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000249 2 en vsdx IEC10000249 V2 EN US Figure 256 GOOSEDPRCV function block 19 4 7 4 Signals GUID 2DC54788 86AF 4B4B 8E57 A89E30F0C433 v1 Except for the BLOCK input the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE function block are used for GOOSE connections These connections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE engineering is enabled For instructions on how to...

Page 641: ...ata The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test Incoming data with q Normal Updated 1 1 0 Incoming data with q oldData 0 0 1 0 Incoming data with q Invalid 0 0 1 0 Incoming data with q te...

Page 642: ...scription IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV 19 4 8 2 Functionality GUID 27B1ED7A C8E8 499E 89C1 C656FB0337F8 v3 GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE 19 4 8 3 Function block GUID 56F0C9F7 98F3 4091 B071 53CA5074DC8F v1 IEC10000250 2 en vsd GOOSEINT...

Page 643: ...on group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled 19 4 8 6 Operation principle GUID 5BBDF772 3B3E 4F7C ABE9 18CE3C1A2E2D v4 The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmiss...

Page 644: ... is restricted to a simple level If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH If quality data validity is INVALID QUESTIONABLE OVERFLOW FAILURE or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW 19 4 9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV 19 4 9 1 Identification GUID B1FFBE08 C823 4A58 9FE0 A9A20DA6BB44 v1 Function description IEC 61850 identificat...

Page 645: ...ering Manual PID 6830 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 485 GOOSEMVRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function SRCMVOUT REAL 0 Source to measurand value output PID 6830 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 486 GOOSEMVRCV Output signals Name Type Description MVOUT REAL Measurand value output DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid fo...

Page 646: ...ver in block Freeze 0 1 0 Receiver in block and communication error Freeze 0 0 0 Receiver in test mode and incoming data with q Normal Updated 1 1 0 Receiver in test mode and incoming data with q Test Updated 1 1 1 Communication Error Freeze 0 0 0 The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection in case easy GOOSE engineering i...

Page 647: ...SPRCV BLOCK SRCSPOUT SPOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000248 V2 EN US Figure 259 GOOSESPRCV function block 19 4 10 4 Signals GUID 2DC54788 86AF 4B4B 8E57 A89E30F0C433 v1 Except for the BLOCK input the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE function block are used for GOOSE connections These connections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE engineering is enabled For instructions on how ...

Page 648: ...data The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test Incoming data with q Normal Updated 1 1 0 Incoming data with q oldData 0 0 1 0 Incoming data with q Invalid 0 0 1 0 Incoming data with q t...

Page 649: ...VALID output will be LOW 19 4 11 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV SEMOD173197 1 v2 19 4 11 1 Functionality GUID 92ECE152 892C 4214 95DE B92718689434 v2 GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via the IEC 61850 8 1 station communication bus This is typically used for sending apparatus position indications for interlocking or reservati...

Page 650: ...P APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL APP11_OP APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COMMVALID TEST IEC07000048 V4 EN US Figure 260 GOOSEINTLKRCV function block 19 4 11 3 Signals SEMOD173205 1 v2 GUID 2DC54788 86AF 4B4B 8E57 A89E30F0C433 v1 Except for the BLOCK input the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE ...

Page 651: ...ion SRCAPP10 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 10 position SRCAPP11 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 11 position SRCAPP12 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 12 position SRCAPP13 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 13 position SRCAPP14 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 14 position SRCAPP15 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 15 position PID 6831 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 492 GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals Name Type Description RES...

Page 652: ...us 9 position is closed APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is ...

Page 653: ... from the sending IED does not happen The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test Incoming data with q Normal Updated 1 1 0 Incoming data with q oldData 0 0 1 0 Incoming data with q Invalid 0 0 1 0 Incoming data with q test 0 0 1 1 Incoming data with q test oldData 0 0 1 1 Receiver in block 0 0 1 0 Receiver in block and communication error ...

Page 654: ...V SEMOD173158 1 v3 19 4 12 1 Function block SEMOD173175 4 v2 IEC07000047 4 en vsd GOOSEBINRCV BLOCK SRCOUT1 SRCOUT2 SRCOUT3 SRCOUT4 SRCOUT5 SRCOUT6 SRCOUT7 SRCOUT8 SRCOUT9 SRCOUT10 SRCOUT11 SRCOUT12 SRCOUT13 SRCOUT14 SRCOUT15 SRCOUT16 OUT1 DVALID1 OUT2 DVALID2 OUT3 DVALID3 OUT4 DVALID4 OUT5 DVALID5 OUT6 DVALID6 OUT7 DVALID7 OUT8 DVALID8 OUT9 DVALID9 OUT10 DVALID10 OUT11 DVALID11 OUT12 DVALID12 OUT...

Page 655: ...binary output 5 SRCOUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 6 SRCOUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 7 SRCOUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 8 SRCOUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 9 SRCOUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 10 SRCOUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 11 SRCOUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 12 SRCOUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 13 SRCOUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Sourc...

Page 656: ...ALID11 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12 DVALID12 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13 DVALID13 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13 OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14 DVALID14 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14 OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15 DVALID15 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15 OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16 DVALID1...

Page 657: ...and communication error 0 0 0 0 Receiver in test mode and incoming data with q Normal Updated 1 1 0 Receiver in test mode and incoming data with q Test Updated 1 1 1 Communication Error 0 0 0 0 At least one of the inputs of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection if easy GOOSE engineering is enabled to receive any data Only those o...

Page 658: ...ed to the desired virtual input SMAI of the IED and used internally in the configuration 19 5 3 Signals 19 5 3 1 Output signals SEMOD166622 1 v1 GUID 942C81AD 22D9 438F 95FA 1972BA2BE2E5 v1 The output signals are the same for all MUs so only the table for MU1_HW is included in this manual PID 6850 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 497 MU1_HW Output signals Name Type Description I1 STRING Analogue input I1 I2...

Page 659: ... information for VA U2QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for VB U3QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for VC U4QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for 3V0 19 5 4 Settings SEMOD166625 1 v2 PID 6850 SETTINGS v3 Table 498 MU1_HW Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description CTStarPoint1 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards pr...

Page 660: ...ta accepted by IED BadReference BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No BadReference indication output for I1 Derived BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Derived indication output for I1 Failure BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Failure indication output for I1 Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inaccurate indication output for I1 Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inconsistent indication output for I1 OldData BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OldData indication output fo...

Page 661: ...dication output for I2 OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange indication output for I2 Overflow BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Overflow indication output for I2 Source BOOLEAN 0 Process 1 Substituted Source indication output for I2 Test BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Test indication output for I2 Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionable Validity indication output I2 BadReference BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Ba...

Page 662: ...tput for I4 Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inaccurate indication output for I4 Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inconsistent indication output for I4 OldData BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OldData indication output for I4 OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OperatorBlocked indication output for I4 Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Oscillatory indication output for I4 OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange indicat...

Page 663: ...No Test indication output for VA Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionable Validity indication output VA BadReference BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No BadReference indication output for VB Derived BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Derived indication output for VB Failure BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Failure indication output for VB Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inaccurate indication output for VB Inconsistent BOOLEAN ...

Page 664: ...ion output for VC Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Oscillatory indication output for VC OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange indication output for VC Overflow BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Overflow indication output for VC Source BOOLEAN 0 Process 1 Substituted Source indication output for VC Test BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Test indication output for VC Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionable V...

Page 665: ...tionable Validity indication output 3V0 19 5 6 Operation principle GUID A1D31CDA 1FE2 4BC0 A472 1B35E73CA1F2 v4 The merging units MUs are situated close to the primary equipment like circuit breakers isolators etc The MUs have the capability to gather measured values from measuring transformers non conventional transducers or both The gathered data are then transmitted to subscribers over the proc...

Page 666: ... Wide GPS Clock IEC080000723enOriginal vsd Preprocessing blocks SMAI Application MU1 MU2 1 A TRM module Preprocessing blocks SMAI IED Access Point IEC08000072 V3 EN US Figure 262 Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and conventional CT VT The function has the following alarm signals MUDATA Section 19 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Station communication 660 Phasor measurement unit RES670 ...

Page 667: ...value SyncAccLevel 1us 4us or Unspecified OR IED doesn t receive global common time UTC from any of the FineSyncSource like IRIG B PTP or GPS SMPLLOST NO 0 indicates that the merging unit samples are received from the merging unit and are accepted YES 1 indicates when merging unit data are generated by internal substitution when one more channel s Quality is not good when merging unit is in Testmo...

Page 668: ...nch 0 and SyncLostMode Block BlockOnLostUTC 7 IED time quality of hardware is not good not within set value SyncAccLevel and SyncLostMode Block BlockOnLostUTC 8 Merging unit channel reported with quality other than good 9 Merging unit channel channels is are in testmode and the IED is not in testmode During Internal substitution the functions connected to that particular merging unit will be block...

Page 669: ...1 malfunctions and all function blocks connected to that 3 phase group get blocked as a result this is also known as conditional blocking functionality TRM F1 F2 F3 F4 MU2 MU1 Lost data Blocked function IEC16000049 1 en vsdx SMAI3 SMAI2 SMAI1 IEC16000049 V1 EN US Figure 263 An example of function blocking 19 5 7 Technical data SEMOD172233 1 v1 SEMOD172236 2 v3 Table 500 IEC UCA 61850 9 2LE communi...

Page 670: ...ents The protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection OSI designed by the International Standardization Organization ISO In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available For other addresses refer to section Related documents It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general 19 6 2 Settings IP14441 1 v2 PID 5...

Page 671: ...es such as measuring values status information and interlocking blocking signals Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information such as events and explicit read and write messages to access device data The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi master implem...

Page 672: ...ted from terminal Binary events M15083 31 v6 Binary events are generated in Event function blocks EVENT 1 to EVENT 20 in the IEDs The EVENT function blocks have predefined LON addresses Table 503 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the EVENT function blocks Addresses to the other inputs on the EVENT function block are consecutive after the first input For example input 15 on EVENT 17 fun...

Page 673: ...0 EVENT 3 1056 EVENT 4 1072 EVENT 5 1088 EVENT 6 1104 EVENT 7 1120 EVENT 8 1136 EVENT 9 1152 EVENT 10 1168 EVENT 11 1184 EVENT 12 1200 EVENT 13 1216 EVENT 14 1232 EVENT 15 1248 EVENT 16 1264 EVENT 17 1280 EVENT 18 1296 EVENT 19 1312 EVENT 20 1328 Event masks M15083 78 v4 Event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool PST under Settings IED settings Monitoring Event F...

Page 674: ...e M15083 135 v4 All analog values are reported cyclic The reporting interval is taken from the connected function if there is a limit supervised signal Otherwise it is taken from the EVENT function block Command handling M15083 80 v4 Commands are transferred using transparent SPA bus messages The transparent SPA bus message is an explicit LON message which contains an ASCII character message follo...

Page 675: ...r block command BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI13 1 I 5403 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI14 1 I 5427 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for...

Page 676: ...WI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block command CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCE...

Page 677: ...ers for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI22 1 I 5611 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI23 1 I 5635 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA p...

Page 678: ... select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI10 1 I 5321 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI11 1 I 5345 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI12 1 I 5369 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI13 1 I 5393 SPA parameters for select Open...

Page 679: ... SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI31 1 I 5825 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI32 1 I 5849 SPA parameters for select Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 ExcOpen ILO 10 ExcClose ILO 11 ExcOpen SCO 20 ExcClose SCO 21 ExcOpen ILO SCO 30 ExcClose ILO SCO 31 SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command Note Send select c...

Page 680: ... 5536 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI20 1 I 5562 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI21 1 I 5585 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI22 1 I 5610 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI23 1 I 5634 SPA parameters for operate...

Page 681: ...SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR09 3 I 7 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR10 3 I 26 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR11 3 I 45 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR12 3 I 56 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR13 3 I 74 SPA parameter for position to be s...

Page 682: ... I 397 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI17 3 I 492 SPA parameter for position to be subst...

Page 683: ...rameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR09 3 I 8 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Ena...

Page 684: ... 3 I 347 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI10 3 I 360 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute enable c...

Page 685: ...date Block SXCBR03 2 I 7883 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR04 2 I 7905 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR05 2 I 7922 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR06 2 I 7943 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR07 2 I 7960 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update bl...

Page 686: ...WI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI09 3 I 349 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI10 3 I 358 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI11 3 I 377 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI12 3 I 396 SPA parameter for update block command Update B...

Page 687: ...ies IEDs The supported network variable type is SNVT_state NV type 83 SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values Multiple command send function block MULTICMDSND is used to pack the information to one value This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multiple command receive function block MULTICMDRCV With horizontal co...

Page 688: ...ULTICMDRCV function blocks in three IEDs The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window From LNT window select Connections NVConnections New en05000719 vsd IEC05000719 V1 EN US Figure 265 The network variables window in LNT Section 19 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Station communication 682 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 689: ... en05000720 vsd IEC05000720 V1 EN US Figure 266 The download configuration window in LNT Communication ports M15083 97 v5 The serial communication module SLM is a mezzanine module placed on the first analog digital conversion module ADM and it is used for LON SPA IEC 60870 5 103 and DNP communication In the following figure X311 ports A B are for SPA IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports C D are for LON p...

Page 690: ...eiver input and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and connection of fibre cables 19 7 IEC 60870 5 103 communication protocol IP14615 1 v2 19 7 1 Introduction M11910 3 v3 IEC 60870 5 103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED communicates with a third party control or monitoring system This syst...

Page 691: ...VN are present 3 3 Will be generated if IB VAB P and Q present 3 2 Will be generated if IB VAB and P or Q missing 3 1 Will be generated if IB is present and IA is missing otherwise I_B in 9 Description for I103MEAS function block 9 IA 3 4 IN AND VN 3 3 IB AND VAB AND P AND Q 3 2 IB AND VAB AND NOT 3 3 3 1 IB AND NOT 3 2 OR 3 3 OR 9 19 7 2 2 Identification GUID 3E1AB624 1B68 4018 B1BA BC2C811F8F74 ...

Page 692: ...Service value for current phase B IC REAL 0 0 Service value for current phase C IN REAL 0 0 Service value for residual current IN VA REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase A VB REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase B VC REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase C V_AB REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase phase AB V_N REAL 0 0 Service value for residual voltage VN P REAL 0 0 Service value f...

Page 693: ...00 2000 00 MW 0 05 1200 00 Maximum value for active power MaxQ 0 00 2000 00 MVAr 0 05 1200 00 Maximum value for reactive power MaxF 15 0 66 0 Hz 1 0 51 0 Maximum system frequency 19 7 3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870 5 103 I103MEASUSR 19 7 3 1 Functionality GUID FC9ED4BD F11C 4BDA 8CDB 3ACF00931D3A v1 I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor dire...

Page 694: ...REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 5 INPUT6 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 6 INPUT7 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 7 INPUT8 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 8 INPUT9 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 9 19 7 3 5 Settings PID 3791 SETTINGS v5 Table 508 I103MEASUSR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default ...

Page 695: ...ion status auto recloser for IEC 60870 5 103 I103AR 19 7 4 1 Functionality GUID 7A132276 35A2 402C 9722 6259D65998F5 v1 I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor direction This block includes the FunctionType parameter and the information number parameter is defined for each output signal 19 7 4 2 Identification GUID 7B066282 79D7 480B BEDE 3C04F0FCB...

Page 696: ... 7 5 Function status ground fault for IEC 60870 5 103 I103EF GUID F23B392E B55D 4BC3 A0A6 B7992D551092 v1 19 7 5 1 Functionality GUID 13F90E95 7C8C 4DCB A9D8 2489B66DB81A v2 I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in monitor direction This block includes the FunctionType parameter and the information number parameter is defined for each output signal 19 7 5 2...

Page 697: ...19 7 6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870 5 103 I103FLTPROT 19 7 6 1 Functionality GUID 6D52F442 1592 4BA7 919C 0CD79046CAE5 v1 I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction Each input on the function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a correspondent signal present in the configuration For example 68_TRGEN represents the Gene...

Page 698: ...0C33EBB7E v2 I103FLTPROT BLOCK 64_PU_A 65_PU_B 66_PU_C 67_STIN 68_TRGEN 69_TR_A 70_TR_B 71_TR_C 72_TRBKUP 73_SCL 74_FW 75_REV 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 83_ZONE6 84_STGEN 85_BFP 86_MTR_A 87_MTR_B 88_MTR_C 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG FLTLOC ANSI10000291 2 en vsdx ANSI10000291 V2 EN US Figure 272 I103FLTPROT function block Section 19 1MRK 511 408 ...

Page 699: ...ECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77 signal received 78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78 zone 1 79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79 zone 2 80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80 zone 3 81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81 zone 4 82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82 zone 5 83_ZONE6 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 83 zone 6 84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84 start general 85_B...

Page 700: ... I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction This block uses parameter as FunctionType and information number parameter is defined for each input signal 19 7 7 2 Identification GUID 5EEBE11C C8E3 4A8A 814F 840E137DB5B5 v1 Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number IED status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103IED 19 7 7 3 Fu...

Page 701: ...INGS v5 Table 516 I103IED Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Function type 1 255 19 7 8 Supervison status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103SUPERV 19 7 8 1 Functionality GUID E7A28D8D 398E 437C 9B58 AE125BC38058 v1 I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor direction This block includes the Functio...

Page 702: ...rotection 38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38 fuse failure VT 46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46 group warning 47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47 group alarm 19 7 8 5 Settings PID 3976 SETTINGS v5 Table 518 I103SUPERV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Function type 1 255 19 7 9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870...

Page 703: ...7 514D 4117 BB31 B9907755580C v1 I103USRDEF BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 RT_START IEC10000294 3 en vsdx IEC10000294 V3 EN US Figure 275 I103USRDEF function block 19 7 9 4 Signals PID 6485 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 519 I103USRDEF Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 ...

Page 704: ...ut 2 1 255 InfNo3 1 255 1 3 Information number for binary input 3 1 255 InfNo4 1 255 1 4 Information number for binary input 4 1 255 InfNo5 1 255 1 5 Information number for binary input 5 1 255 InfNo6 1 255 1 6 Information number for binary input 6 1 255 InfNo7 1 255 1 7 Information number for binary input 7 1 255 InfNo8 1 255 1 8 Information number for binary input 8 1 255 TypNo1 Absolute Relativ...

Page 705: ... details The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a userdefined INF Refer to the IEC 60870 5 103 standard for details The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time This adheres to the TYPE IDENTIFICATION TYP message types 1 time tagged message and 2 time tagged message with relative time of the IEC 60870 5 103 standard The GiNon para...

Page 706: ... I103CMD Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands PID 3969 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 522 I103CMD Output signals Name Type Description 16 AR BOOLEAN Information number 16 disable enable autorecloser 17 DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17 block of differential protection 18 PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18 block of protection 19 7 10 5 Settings PID 3969 SETTINGS v5...

Page 707: ...83 1 en vsd I103IEDCMD BLOCK 19 LEDRS 23 GRP1 24 GRP2 25 GRP3 26 GRP4 IEC10000283 V1 EN US Figure 277 I103IEDCMD function block 19 7 11 4 Signals PID 3788 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 524 I103IEDCMD Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands PID 3788 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 525 I103IEDCMD Output signals Name Type Description 19 LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19 reset L...

Page 708: ...or each output signal 19 7 12 2 Identification GUID 9D6D1636 36C6 4C4E B157 2D827820DDC7 v1 Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Function commands user defined for IEC 60870 5 103 I103USRCMD 19 7 12 3 Function block GUID 5EBEAED5 ABD9 4257 B879 DF7FD9F7805A v1 IEC10000284 1 en vsd I103USRCMD BLOCK OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OU...

Page 709: ...umber for output 1 1 255 InfNo_2 1 255 1 2 Information number for output 2 1 255 InfNo_3 1 255 1 3 Information number for output 3 1 255 InfNo_4 1 255 1 4 Information number for output 4 1 255 InfNo_5 1 255 1 5 Information number for output 5 1 255 InfNo_6 1 255 1 6 Information number for output 6 1 255 InfNo_7 1 255 1 7 Information number for output 7 1 255 InfNo_8 1 255 1 8 Information number fo...

Page 710: ...on Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 I103GENCMD 19 7 13 3 Function block GUID 6EC8453E 0D00 4720 95A6 156C41CA46BB v1 IEC10000285 1 en vsd I103GENCMD BLOCK CMD_OFF CMD_ON IEC10000285 V1 EN US Figure 279 I103GENCMD function block 19 7 13 4 Signals PID 3970 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 530 I103GENCMD Input signals Name T...

Page 711: ...and it is GI enabled This means that any state transition that is to ON OFF intermediate and faulty is reported spontaneously However the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate Position Off See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more information Input SELECT is a single indication signal and it is also GI enabled State transitio...

Page 712: ...function block 19 7 14 4 Signals PID 6997 INPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 533 I103POSCMD Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object 19 7 14 5 Settings PID 6997 SETTINGS v1 Table 534 I103POSCMD Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Fun...

Page 713: ...on for more information When input BLOCK is ON the function ignores GI requests and ceases all monitoring activity Consequently no transitions will be detected The I103POSCMDV function is also equipped with two additional commands Operate and Cancel These are hidden in ACT and respond only to base INF 2 and 3 respectively The base INF Information Number parameter is an IEC 60870 5 103 identifier t...

Page 714: ...balanced master slave protocol for coded bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit s In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave The communication is based on a point to point principle The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870 5 103 communication messages Introduction...

Page 715: ...unctions are included in the protection and control IED Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be considered to ensure correct time stamping Commands in control direction M11874 27 v1 Commands in control direction I103IEDCMD M11874 29 v6 Command block in control direction with defined output signals Number of instances 1 Function type is selected with parameter FunctionTyp...

Page 716: ...type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter FunctionType Information number must be selected for each output signal Default values are 1 8 Table 539 I103USRCMD supported indications INF 1 Description 1 Output signal 01 2 Output signal 02 3 Output signal 03 4 Output signal 04 5 Output signal 05 6 Output signal 06 7 Output signal 07 8 Output signal 08 1 User def...

Page 717: ...ionType Information number is required for each input signal Table 541 I103USRDEF Information number default values INF Description GI TYP COT 11 Input signal 01 x 1 2 1 7 9 2 Input signal 02 x 1 2 1 7 9 3 Input signal 03 x 1 2 1 7 9 4 Input signal 04 x 1 2 1 7 9 5 Input signal 05 x 1 2 1 7 9 6 Input signal 06 x 1 2 1 7 9 7 Input signal 07 x 1 2 1 7 9 8 Input signal 08 x 1 2 1 7 9 1 User defined i...

Page 718: ...ed for each output signal Table 543 I103EF supported indications INF Description 51 Ground fault forward 52 Ground fault reverse Autorecloser indications in monitor direction I103AR M11874 363 v6 Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions Number of instances 1 Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType Information number is defined for each output sign...

Page 719: ... 7 75 Reverse busbar 2 N 1 7 76 Signal transmitted 2 N 1 7 77 Signal received 2 N 1 7 78 Zone 1 2 N 1 7 79 Zone 2 2 N 1 7 80 Zone 3 2 N 1 7 81 Zone 4 2 N 1 7 82 Zone 5 2 N 1 7 84 Pickup general 2 Y 1 7 9 85 Breaker failure 2 N 1 7 86 Trip measuring system phase A 2 N 1 7 87 Trip measuring system phase B 2 N 1 7 88 Trip measuring system phase C 2 N 1 7 89 Trip measuring system neutral N 2 N 1 7 90 ...

Page 720: ...ard and require that a rated value to use as base exists and then use 1 2 or 2 4 times rated as maxVal You can use 2 4 times rated as maxVal but as there is no way to propagate value to client the use of a scale factor on rated does not make much difference You can configure client client scaled max 1 2 rated or client scaled max 1 0 maxVal If the client has a hard coded gain of 1 2 rated then cli...

Page 721: ...lue PARAM 2 3 9 Measurands II Format Measurand II 7 3 1 8 in IEC 60870 5 103 1997 semantics per IE is defined by semantics of connected source Number of information elements is defined by index of first input not connected Example Input1 Input2 and Input4 are connected Input3 is not connected Number of information elements will be 3 Input3 NOT connected 1 2 that is only Input1 and Input2 will be t...

Page 722: ...lable for transfer to the master A successfully transferred disturbance acknowledged by the master will not be reported to the master again When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be sent to the master an updated list of available disturbances can be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list For example when a disturbance...

Page 723: ...s action FAN is equal to disturbance number which is incremented for each disturbance ASDU26 ASDU31 When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24 the protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26 which contains an information element named NOF number of grid faults This number must indicate fault number in the power system that is a fault in the power system with several tr...

Page 724: ...turbances Yes 26 Ready for transm of disturbance data Yes 27 Ready for transm of a channel Yes 28 Ready for transm of tags Yes 29 Transmission of tags Yes 30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes 31 End of transmission Yes Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction ASDU Yes 6 Time synchronization Yes 7 General interrogation Yes 10 Generic data No 20 General command Yes 21 Generic command Yes ...

Page 725: ...fibre optic cables are laid out pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres The module is identified with a number on the label on the module 19 8 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND SEMOD119881 1 v3 GUID 1A6E066C 6399 4D37 8CA5 3074537E48B2 v3 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Mul...

Page 726: ...nding binary output This means that no connected function block may have a cycle time that is higher than the execution cycle time of the particular MULTICMDRCV instance 19 8 3 Function block SEMOD119978 1 v1 SEMOD119976 5 v2 IEC06000007 2 en vsd MULTICMDRCV BLOCK ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTP...

Page 727: ... of function PID 399 INPUTSIGNALS v10 Table 549 MULTICMDSND Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 INPUT11 BO...

Page 728: ...Output 4 OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid PID 399 OUTPUTSIGNALS v10 Table 551 MULTIC...

Page 729: ...ata 19 8 6 Operation principle M14793 3 v3 There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block The first two are fast 8 ms cycle time while the others are slow 100 ms cycle time Each instance has 16 binary inputs to which 16 independent signals can be connected Connected signals are sent through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent MULTICMDRCV located on a different IED The MULTICMDRCV fun...

Page 730: ... basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation On Off 19 10 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG 19 10 1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG GUID BED7C3D6 6BE3 4DAC 84B3 92239E819CC0 v1 ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to Each server can be configured with IP address IP port numb...

Page 731: ...4 External log server 3 port number ExtLogSrv3IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 3 IP address ExtLogSrv4Type Disabled ExtLogSrv1Type SYSLOG TCP IP CEF TCP IP Disabled External log server 4 type ExtLogSrv4Port 1 65535 1 514 External log server 4 port number ExtLogSrv4IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 4 IP address ExtLogSrv5Type Disabled ExtLogSrv1Type SYSLOG TCP IP ...

Page 732: ...726 ...

Page 733: ...IEDs The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for any purpose such as communication scheme related signals transfer trip and or other binary signals between IEDs Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line Data Communication Module LCDM The LDCM then acts as an interface to 64 kbit s and 2Mbit s communication channels for duplex communicatio...

Page 734: ...EL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link PID 6472 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 558 LDCMRecBinStat2 Output signals Name Type Description CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1 CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2 CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3 CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4 COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication COMALM BOOLEAN Delayed alarm s...

Page 735: ... alarm signal for communication failure BLKDIFF BOOLEAN Link error values are substituted diff protection is blocked ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non valid address RED_ACT BOOLEAN Redundant channel active CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization REMBLKDF BOOL...

Page 736: ...ing message YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link ADINV1 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV2 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV3 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV4 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV5 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV6 BOOLEAN Analog dat...

Page 737: ...ing message YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link ADINV1 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV2 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV3 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV4 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV5 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end ADINV6 BOOLEAN Analog dat...

Page 738: ...Stat2 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ChannelMode Blocked Normal OutOfService Normal Channel mode of LDCM TerminalNo 0 255 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential communication RemoteTermNo 0 255 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal DiffSync Echo GPS Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM GPSSyncErr Block Echo Block Operation mode when GPS synchron...

Page 739: ... t Diff PID 6473 SETTINGS v2 Table 564 LDCMRecBinStat3 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ChannelMode Blocked Normal OutOfService Normal Channel mode of LDCM TerminalNo 0 255 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential communication RemoteTermNo 0 255 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal DiffSync Echo GPS Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM GPSSyncErr ...

Page 740: ...TTINGS v2 Table 565 LDCMRecBinS2_2M Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ChannelMode Blocked Normal OutOfService Normal Channel mode of LDCM TerminalNo 0 255 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential communication RemoteTermNo 0 255 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal DiffSync Echo GPS Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM GPSSyncErr Block Echo Block Op...

Page 741: ...55 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal DiffSync Echo GPS Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM GPSSyncErr Block Echo Block Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost CommSync Slave Master Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM OptoPower LowPower HighPower LowPower Transmission power for LDCM ComAlarmDel 5 10000 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication alarm signal is activated ComAl...

Page 742: ...OOLEAN 0 Ok 1 SyncErr 2 No RXD 3 LocalGPSErr 4 RemGPSErr 5 LocAndRemG PSErr 6 LocalADErr 7 RemADErr 8 LocAndRemA DErr 9 AddressErr 10 FreqConfErr 11 LatencyConf Err Status of communication link PID 6472 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 568 LDCMRecBinStat2 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description CommStatus BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 SyncErr 2 No RXD 3 LocalGPSErr 4 RemGPSErr 5 LocAndRemG PSErr 6 LocalADEr...

Page 743: ...LatencyConf Err Status of communication link PID 6474 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 570 LDCMRecBinS2_2M Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description CommStatus BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 SyncErr 2 No RXD 3 LocalGPSErr 4 RemGPSErr 5 LocAndRemG PSErr 6 LocalADErr 7 RemADErr 8 LocAndRemA DErr 9 AddressErr 10 FreqConfErr 11 LatencyConf Err Status of communication link 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 20 Remote commu...

Page 744: ...7 94 en01000134 vsd Start flag Information CRC Stop flag 8 bits n x 16 bits 8 bits 16 bits IEC01000134 V1 EN US Figure 284 Data message structure The start and stop flags are composed of 0111 1110 sequence 7E hexadecimal as defined in the HDLC standard CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used but instead separate addressing...

Page 745: ... the same way as in 64 kbit mode but the CRC field is 32 bits It carries 9 analog samples and 192 general purpose binary signals 20 2 Transmission of local analog data via LDCM to remote end function block LDCMTRN called LDCMTransmit GUID B057C0DD 4EA8 4F6A B57C 3395DFB38463 v2 20 2 1 Identification GUID 3387F71E 020E 4556 AA55 8204340EFA47 v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 6061...

Page 746: ...823 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 572 LDCMTRN Input signals Name Type Default Description CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group1 line L1 to remote end CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group1 line L2 to remote end CT1L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group1 line L3 to remote end CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group1 neutral N to remote end CT2L1 STR...

Page 747: ...1 line L2 to remote end CH3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit analog group1 line L3 to remote end CH4 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit analog group2 line L1 to remote end CH5 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit analog group2 line L2 to remote end CH6 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit analog group2 line L3 to remote end CH7 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit analog group3 lin...

Page 748: ...742 ...

Page 749: ...ard the interests of our customers both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED are protected by means of authorization handling The authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED local through the local HMI remote through the communication ports The IED users can be created deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management tool 1MRK 511 ...

Page 750: ...cess or operate different areas of the IED and tools functionality The pre defined user types are given in Table 574 Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600 The meaning of the legends used in the table R Read W Write No access rights Section 21 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Security 744 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Techn...

Page 751: ...W R R R R W R W File loading database loading from XML file R W R W R W File dumping database dumping to XML file R W R W R W File transfer FTP file transfer R W R W R W R W R W File transfer limited FTP file transfer R R W R R W R W R W R W File Transfer SPA File Transfer R W R W Database access for normal user R R W R R W R W R W R W User administration user management FTP File Transfer R R W R ...

Page 752: ... more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded into the IED then when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected the Log on window will appear The cursor is focused on the User identity field so upon pressing the key the user can change the user name by browsing the list of users with the up and down arrows A...

Page 753: ...efault when other users are defined same as VIEWER Administrator Full rights Password Administrator This user has to be used when reading out disturbances with third party FTP client Table 576 Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351 8 User roles Role explanation User rights VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the me...

Page 754: ...of the servers are reachable Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica There might be users that are not assigned to any replication group IED only replicates those users which are part of replication group configured in the IED This replication can be disabled using PCM600 by the security administrator which means that the IED will forward login requests to the SDM600 f...

Page 755: ...nu logon time out For more information on the functions Authority Management AUTHMAN Authority Status ATHSTAT and Authority Check ATHCHCK functions refer to chapter Basic IED functions in the Technical Manual 21 2 Authority management AUTHMAN 21 2 1 Identification GUID 7925E6A3 301D 44A5 982F 167805EEA473 v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 dev...

Page 756: ...y Using FTP without TLS encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities This mode is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings create a specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer The password of this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire 21 3 3 Settings PID 6703 SETTINGS v3 Table ...

Page 757: ...g on are reported 21 4 3 Function block SEMOD158547 4 v4 IEC06000503 2 en vsd ATHSTAT USRBLKED LOGGEDON IEC06000503 V2 EN US Figure 288 ATHSTAT function block 21 4 4 Signals PID 3773 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 580 ATHSTAT Output signals Name Type Description USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on GUID 87CF079A 64C8 46AE B7E4 A0...

Page 758: ...ON is activated The output can for example be connected on Event EVENT function block for LON SPA The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus 21 5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIGIP1721 1 v2 21 5 1 Functionality M11399 3 v7 Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system events generated by the different built in self supervis...

Page 759: ...and includes Normal micro processor watchdog function Checking of digitized measuring signals Other alarms for example hardware and time synchronization The self supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI or from the Event Viewer in PCM600 Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the actual information from the self supervision function can be reviewed The information can b...

Page 760: ...TERNAL FAIL located on the power supply module This contact is closed when the IED either does not have auxiliary power or when one or more error conditions are present in the IED for example harware error Some output signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block The signals from this function block are sent as events via IEC 61850 to the station level of the control system These signals...

Page 761: ...tatus Internal warning This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active RTCERROR IEC61850ERROR RTCERROR Real Time Clock status Real time clock This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the real time clock TIMESYNCHERROR Time Synchroniz ation status Time synch This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization is lost or...

Page 762: ... Error Power Supply Module Error status PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware error BIM BIM Error Binary In Module Error status BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error n slot number BOM BOM Error Binary Out Module Error status BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error n slot number IOM IOM Error In Out Module Error status IOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error n ...

Page 763: ... 5 5 2 Supervision of analog inputs M11401 136 v7 The analog signals to the A D converter is internally distributed into two different converters one with low amplification and one with high amplification When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels a direct comparison of the two A D converter channels can be performed If the validation fails the CPU will be informed and an alarm w...

Page 764: ...4085 8166 33FDC327CEB5 v2 IEC09000946 vsd CHNGLCK LOCK ACTIVE OVERRIDE IEC09000946 V2 EN US Figure 292 CHNGLCK function block 21 6 3 Signals GUID 1B253577 C81B 40E3 B406 1F6586DCE545 v2 PID 3786 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 585 CHNGLCK Input signals Name Type Default Description LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock PID 3786 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 586 CHNGLCK Output signals Name Type Description ACTIVE BOO...

Page 765: ...ication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network 21 7 2 Operation principle GUID 94340D4F 4D32 409B BA1A BA49A0C3F297 v5 The denial of service prote...

Page 766: ... ports channel A and B DOSLINKA and DOSLINKB indicates that DOS functionality is active on channel A and channel B DOSALARM indicates that DOS functionality is active on the access point SCHLCCH and FRONTSTATUS LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status DOSALARM indicates that DOS functionality is active on the access point The DOS functionality activates when the inbound traffic rate exceeds 3000 ...

Page 767: ...port are the acceptable time synchronization sources for synchrophasor measurement applications and RES670 supports both Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source 22 1 2 Settings IP9657 1 v2 SEMOD55141 5 v6 There are two groups of parameter settings related to time System time Synchronization The System time group relates to setting the on off and start end of the ...

Page 768: ...tion accuracy PID 6608 SETTINGS v4 Table 588 SNTP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ServerIP Add 0 18 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Server IP address RedServIP Add 0 18 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Redundant server IP address LocalPort 0 65535 1 49152 Port number in the IED to communicate with the SNTP server PID 6212 SETTINGS v5 Table 589 DSTENABLE Non group settings basic N...

Page 769: ... daylight time starts DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time starts UTCTimeOfDay 24 00 23 30 00 30 00 00 00 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time starts 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 22 Basic IED functions Phasor measurement unit...

Page 770: ...when daylight time ends DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time ends UTCTimeOfDay 24 00 23 30 00 30 00 00 00 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time ends Section 22 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Basic IED functions 764 Phasor measurement unit...

Page 771: ... 10 00 9 30 9 00 8 00 7 00 6 00 5 00 4 30 4 00 3 30 3 00 2 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 3 30 4 00 4 30 5 00 5 30 5 45 6 00 6 30 7 00 8 00 8 45 9 00 9 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 11 30 12 00 12 45 13 00 14 00 1 00 Local time from UTC 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 22 Basic IED functions Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 765 Technical manual ...

Page 772: ...ces the clock with the lowest priority 2 is selected as the reference clock Grand Master 22 1 3 Operation principle IP12360 1 v4 22 1 3 1 General concepts M11346 77 v1 Time definitions M11346 80 v3 The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock and the time the clock is intended to have Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error that is the time gained or lost by t...

Page 773: ...stMode is not required to set as Block BlockonLostUTC when differential protection is based on ECHO mode Fast clock synchronization mode At start up and after interruptions in the GPS PTP or IRIG B time signals the deviation between the external time system and the internal differential time system can be substantial A new start up is also required for example after maintenance of the auxiliary vo...

Page 774: ...ave several potential sources of synchronization with different maximum errors This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality and to adjust its internal clock based on this source The maximum error of a clock can be defined as The maximum error of the last used synchronization message The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the ...

Page 775: ...ed to the other messages a spike filter in the IED removes this time message If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also has a large offset the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 5 milliseconds If the offset is more than the threshold 5ms the IED is brought into a safe state and th...

Page 776: ... the signal is modulated and the information transmitted To receive IRIG B there are two connectors in the IRIG B module one galvanic BNC connector and one optical ST connector IRIG B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface and IRIG B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical interface where x in 00x or 12x means a number in the range of 0 7 00 m...

Page 777: ... IED and the merging unit cannot be synchronized from the IED then use GPS based clocks to provide PTP synch as well as sync to the merging unit If synchronization of the IED and the merging unit is based on GPS set the parameter LostSyncMode to BlockOnLostUTC in order to provide a block of protection functions whenever the global common time is lost If PTP is not used use the same synchronization...

Page 778: ...D connects the Access Points via a boundary clock If PTP is On on redundant Access Points the IED acts as a Transparent Clock In a network there may be variety of possible masters that are connected together where the masters by selection using the priority of PTP also called the Best Master Algorithm or BMC to determine which of them that is the best master Priority order according to PTP 1 Prior...

Page 779: ...D 8AEB81D0 1731 46DF A206 D2E758823575 v1 Table 596 Time synchronization PTP IEC IEEE 61850 9 3 Supported types of clock Boundary Clock BC Ordinary Clock OC Transparent Clock TC Accuracy According to standard IEC IEEE 61850 9 3 Number of nodes According to standard IEC IEEE 61850 9 3 Ports supported All rear Ethernet ports 22 2 Parameter setting groups IP1745 1 v1 22 2 1 Functionality M12006 6 v7 ...

Page 780: ... 3 as active ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active PID 6558 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 598 ACTVGRP Output signals Name Type Description GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is a...

Page 781: ...ured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED To do this PCM600 must be used The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms More than one input may be activated at the same time In such cases the lower order setting ...

Page 782: ... 2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1 ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 ActiveGroup ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP5 GRP6 IOx Bly5 IOx Bly6 Æ Æ ACTIVATE GROUP 5 ACTIVATE GROUP 6 GRP_CHGD ANSI05000119 V2 EN US Figure 296 Connection of the function to external circuits The above example also includes seven output signals for confirmation of which group that is active 22 3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE IP1647...

Page 783: ..._TEST BLOCK NOEVENT INPUT SETTING IEC61850 IEC14000072 1 en vsd IEC09000219 V2 EN US Figure 297 TESTMODE function block 22 3 3 Signals IP9680 1 v2 PID 6730 INPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 600 TESTMODE Input signals Name Type Default Description IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode PID 6730 OUTPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 601 TESTMODE Output signals Name Type Description TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via ...

Page 784: ...te input from configuration OUTPUT signal is activated or setting from local HMI SETTING signal is activated While the IED is in test mode the yellow Pickup LED will flash and all functions can be blocked depending on the configuration of the testmode component Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling M11828 3 v8 The deblocking is reseted when exiting...

Page 785: ...tation object and unit names 22 4 2 Settings GUID 3C49A222 FFE4 492B A96C 9E9965FA2CB4 v2 PID 6801 SETTINGS v1 Table 603 TERMINALID Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description StationName 0 18 1 Station name Station name StationNumber 0 99999 1 0 Station number ObjectName 0 18 1 Object name Object name ObjectNumber 0 99999 1 0 Object number UnitName 0 18 1 Unit name Un...

Page 786: ...60 74ED82DE17F7 v4 The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600 22 5 3 Factory defined settings M11789 39 v10 The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in the case of maintenance repair interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading The factory made settings can not be changed...

Page 787: ...rdware added to the product 3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means functions or hardware is either changed or enhanced in the product IEDMainFunType Main function type code according to IEC 60870 5 103 Example 128 meaning line protection SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate 22 6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI SEMOD55793 1 v2 22 6 1 Functionality M15302 3 v5 The Signal m...

Page 788: ...LEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI5 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI6 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI7 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI8 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI9 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI10 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input PID 3940 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 605 SMBI Output signals Name Type Description BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2 BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3 BI4 BOOLEAN Binary inpu...

Page 789: ...al IO and SMBI function The input output user defined name will also appear on the respective output input signal 22 7 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO SEMOD55215 1 v2 22 7 1 Functionality M15311 3 v5 The Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO function is used within the Application Configuration Tool ACT in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT see the application manual to get info...

Page 790: ... transferring to the real hardware outputs via the Signal Matrix Tool SMT or ACT The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they as well as the whole function block can be tag named The name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO 22 8 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI SEMOD55233 1 v2 22 8 1 Functionality SEMOD55902 4 v6 The Signal matrix...

Page 791: ...ut signals Name Type Description AI1 REAL Analog milliampere input 1 AI2 REAL Analog milliampere input 2 AI3 REAL Analog milliampere input 3 AI4 REAL Analog milliampere input 4 AI5 REAL Analog milliampere input 5 AI6 REAL Analog milliampere input 6 22 8 4 Operation principle SEMOD55908 4 v6 The Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI function see figure 300 receives its inputs from the real hardware mA i...

Page 792: ...tion is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT for example protection measurement or monitoring functions 22 9 2 Function block SEMOD55766 1 v2 SEMOD54868 4 v11 SMAI1 BLOCK DFTSPFC REVROT GRP1_A GRP1_B GRP1_C GRP1_N SPFCOUT G1AI3P G1AI1 G1AI2 G1AI3 G1AI4 G1N ANSI14000027 1 en vsd ANSI14000027 V1 EN US Figure 301 SMAI1 function block Figure 301 is an example of SM...

Page 793: ...n BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1 DFTSPFC REAL 20 0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1 GRP1_A STRING First analog input used for phase A or AB quantity GRP1_B STRING Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity GRP1_C STRING Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity GRP1_N STRING Fourth analog input used for resi...

Page 794: ..._N STRING Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity PID 3406 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 612 SMAI2 Output signals Name Type Description G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3 phase group G2AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1 G2AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2 G2AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3 G2AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4 G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group paramet...

Page 795: ...f DFTRefGrp1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFTRefGrp4 DFTRefGrp5 DFTRefGrp6 DFTRefGrp7 DFTRefGrp8 DFTRefGrp9 DFTRefGrp10 DFTRefGrp11 DFTRefGrp12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef DFT reference ConnectionType Ph N Ph Ph Ph N Input connection type AnalogInputType Voltage Current Voltage Analog input signal type Table 614 SMAI1 Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Negatio...

Page 796: ...imit for frequency calculation in of VBase 22 9 5 Operation principle SEMOD55746 4 v13 Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function SMAI can receive four analog signals three phases and one neutral or residual value either voltage or current see figure 301 and figure 302 SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired phase angle RMS value frequency and freque...

Page 797: ...requency values MinValFreqMeas is set as of VBase 3 If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph Ph at least two of the inputs GRPx_A GRPx_B and GRPx_C where 1 x 12 must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows A B to GRPxA B C to GRPxB C A to GRPxC If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph N all three inputs GRPx_A GR...

Page 798: ...nd Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC 81 due to that all other information except frequency and positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated 22 10 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM SEMOD55968 1 v2 22 10 1 Functionality SEMOD55976 4 v4 Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three phase analog signals of the same type for those IED functions that ...

Page 799: ... fundamental cycle from internal DFT reference function AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI blocks AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 signals from both SMAI blocks AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 3 signals from both SMAI blocks AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of i...

Page 800: ...e Unit Step Default Description FreqMeasMinVal 5 200 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in of UBase 22 10 5 Operation principle SEMOD55749 4 v5 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three phase signals from Signal matrix for analog inputs function SMAI In the same way the BLOCK input will reset all the outputs of the function to 0 22 11 Global base values GBASVAL GUID 2FDB0A2C 10...

Page 801: ...gs GUID C73A66FB 5D6E 4DC3 B8B5 046AEC2F1FDE v1 PID 4026 SETTINGS v7 Table 621 GBASVAL Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description VBase 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Global base voltage IBase 1 99999 A 1 3000 Global base current SBase 1 00 200000 00 MVA 0 05 2000 00 Global base apparent power 22 12 Primary system values PRIMVAL 22 12 1 Identification GUID B8B3535D 227B ...

Page 802: ...Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Frequency 50 0 60 0 Hz 10 0 50 0 Rated system frequency PhaseRotation Normal ABC Inverse ACB Normal ABC System phase rotation Section 22 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Basic IED functions 796 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 803: ... 1 1 Variants of case size with local HMI display M15024 3 v5 ANSI04000458 2 en psd ANSI04000458 V2 EN US Figure 305 1 2 19 case with local HMI display 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 797 Technical manual ...

Page 804: ...US Figure 306 3 4 19 case with local HMI display ANSI04000460 2 en psd ANSI04000460 V2 EN US Figure 307 1 1 19 case with local HMI display Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 798 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 805: ...1 AC 2 670 1 2 PG V4 EN US Rear position Module X11 PSM X31 and X32 etc to X51 and X52 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X301 X302 X303 X304 SFP X305 LDCM X306 LDCM or OEM X3061 X3062 SFP if OEM is selected X311 A B C D SLM X312 X313 LDCM IRIG B GTM or RS485 X401 TRM 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 799 Technical manual ...

Page 806: ...on Module X11 PSM X31 and X32 etc to X101 and X102 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X301 X302 X303 X304 SFP X305 LDCM X306 LDCM or OEM X3061 X3062 SFP if OEM is selected X311 A B C D SLM X312 X313 LDCM IRIG B GTM or RS485 X401 TRM Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 800 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 807: ... position Module X11 PSM X31 and X32 etc to X71 and X72 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X301 X302 X303 X304 SFP X305 LDCM X306 LDCM or OEM X3061 X3062 SFP if OEM is selected X311 A B C D SLM X312 X313 X322 X323 LDCM IRIG B GTM or RS485 X401 TRM 1 X411 TRM 2 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 801 Technical manual ...

Page 808: ... US Rear position Module X11 PSM X31 and X32 etc to X161 and X162 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X301 X302 X303 X304 SFP X305 LDCM X306 LDCM or OEM X3061 X3062 SFP if OEM is selected X311 A B C D SLM X312 X313 LDCM IRIG B GTM or RS485 X401 TRM Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 802 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 809: ...M X31 and X32 etc to X131 and X132 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X301 X302 X303 X304 SFP X305 LDCM X306 LDCM or OEM X3061 X3062 SFP if OEM is selected X311 A B C D SLM X312 X313 X322 X323 LDCM IRIG B GTM or RS485 X401 TRM 1 X411 TRM 2 SLM and LDCM modules not used in RES670 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 803 Technical manual ...

Page 810: ...or communication boards Combined backplane module CBM The module has two main purposes to distribute supply voltages from the PSM to the other modules and to act as a communication carrier via its two buses CompactPCI for fast I O and communication and CAN for slow I O Universal backplane module UBM The module is used to interconnect the TRM and the ADM It also connects the NUM with the LHMI Table...

Page 811: ...mpact PCI bus NUM is a compact PCI system card that is it controls bus mastering clock distribution and receives interrupts NUM provides up to 4 optical type LC or galvanic type RJ45 Ethernet ports one basic and three optional 23 2 2 2 Functionality M12644 3 v5 The numeric module NUM is a high performance CPU module based on a dual core processor It is 6U high and occupies one slot Contact with th...

Page 812: ... length 1310 nm Class 1 laser safety Optical connector Type LC Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s Table 631 SFP Galvanic RJ45 Quantity Rated value Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and redundant links for communication using any protocol Standard IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX Type of cable Cat5e FTP Connector Type RJ45 Communication Speed Fast Ethernet ...

Page 813: ...er supply module contains a built in self regulated DC DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system The DC input is protected against inverse polarity within the rated DC voltage range Connection diagram M6377 8 v3 IEC08000476 V2 EN US Figure 308 PSM Connection diagram 23 2 3 3 Technical data SEMOD52801 1 v1 M12286 1 v6 Table 633 PSM Power supply m...

Page 814: ...ach with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers Basic versions 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels 7 current channels and 5 voltage channels 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels 12 current channels 6 current channels 10 current channels and 2 voltage channels The rated values and channel type measurement or protection of the current inputs are selected at orde...

Page 815: ...ection transformer Description Value Frequency Rated frequency fr 50 60 Hz Operating range fr 10 Current inputs Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A Operating range 0 100 x Ir Thermal withstand 100 Ir for 1 s 30 Ir for 10 s 10 Ir for 1 min 4 Ir continuously Table continues on next page 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 809 Technical manual ...

Page 816: ...lue Frequency Rated frequency fr 50 60 Hz Operating range fr 10 Current inputs Rated current Ir 1A 5 A Operating range 0 1 8 Ir 0 1 6 Ir Thermal withstand 80 Ir for 1 s 25 Ir for 10 s 10 Ir for 1 min 1 8 Ir for 30 min 1 1 Ir continuously 65 Ir for 1 s 20 Ir for 10 s 8 Ir for 1 min 1 6 Ir for 30 min 1 1 Ir continuously Burden 200 mVA at Ir 350 mVA at Ir Voltage inputs Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V ...

Page 817: ...ltage and current from the transformer module Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage level To gain dynamic range for the current inputs two shunts with separate A D channels are used for each input current In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A D converter Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency a...

Page 818: ...annel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 1 2v 2 5v level shift en05000474 vsd IEC05000474 V1 EN US Figure 310 The ADM layout Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 812 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 819: ...iguration of the input signals refer to section Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals When blocked a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency making it possible to use the input for pulse counting The blocking frequency may also be set Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation...

Page 820: ...peration uncertain No operation This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module NUM The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input despite the low steady state power consumption which is shown in figure 312 and 313 Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 814 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 821: ...t for the standard version of BIM en07000105 1 vsd 50 5 5 ms mA IEC07000105 V2 EN US Figure 313 Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 815 Technical manual ...

Page 822: ...Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2 value BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3 value Table continues on next page Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 816 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 823: ...OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning 23 2 7 4 Settings PID 3473 SETTINGS v2 Table 638 BIM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation Disabled Enabled DebounceTime 0 001 0 020 s 0 001 0 001 Debounce time for binary inputs OscBlock 1 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit OscRelease 1 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit 23 2 7 5 M...

Page 824: ...mum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range M50609 2 v7 Table 641 BIM Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs 16 DC voltage RL 24 30 V 48 60 V 125 V 220 250 V RL 20 RL 20 RL 20 RL 20 Power consumption 24 30 V 48 60 V 125 V 220 250 V max 0 05 W input max 0 1 W input...

Page 825: ...ommon power source input to the contacts see figure 315 This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and closing coils If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current a paral...

Page 826: ...99 V1 EN US Figure 315 Relay pair example 1 Output connection from relay 1 2 Output signal power source connection 3 Output connection from relay 2 Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 820 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 827: ... outputs BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1 BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6 BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7 BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8 Table continues on next page 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 821 Technical manual ...

Page 828: ...O20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 20 BO21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 21 BO22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 22 BO23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 23 BO24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 24 PID 3439 OUTPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 643 BOM Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status 23 2 8 4 Settings PID 3439 SETTINGS v2 Table 644 BOM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Def...

Page 829: ...E BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 3 value BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 3 force BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 3 status BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 4 value BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 4 force BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 4 status BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 5 value BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal ...

Page 830: ...AN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 9 status BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 10 value BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 10 force BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 10 status BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 nary output 11 value BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 11 force BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 11 status BO...

Page 831: ...CE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 16 force BO16 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 16 status BO17VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 17 value B017FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 17 force BO17 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 17 status BO18VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 18 value BO18FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 18 force BO...

Page 832: ...atus BO23VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 23 value BO23FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 23 force BO23 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 23 status BO24VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 24 value BO24FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced nary output 24 force BO24 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 24 status 23 2 8 6 Technical data SEMOD55355 1 v1 M12441 1 v8...

Page 833: ... respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life Maximum two relays per BOM IOM SOM should be activated continuously due to power dissipation 23 2 9 Static binary output module SOM SEMOD174197 1 v1 23 2 9 1 Introduction SEMOD174196 4 v4 The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output relays for u...

Page 834: ...K002802 AB 13 670 1 2 PG ANSI V1 EN US Figure 318 Connection diagram of the static output module 23 2 9 3 Signals PID 3939 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 647 SOM Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1 BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 Table continues on next page Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 828 ...

Page 835: ...D 3939 SETTINGS v5 Table 649 SOM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation Disabled Enabled 23 2 9 5 Monitored data PID 3939 MONITOREDDATA v5 Table 650 SOM Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Static binary output module status BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 1 value BO1...

Page 836: ...RCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 5 force BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 5 status BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 6 value BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 6 force BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 6 status BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 7 value BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 7 force BO7 BOOLEAN 0 ...

Page 837: ...1 status BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 12 value BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 12 force BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 12 status 23 2 9 6 Technical data SEMOD175396 1 v1 SEMOD175395 2 v7 Table 651 SOM Static Output Module reference standard IEC 61810 2 Static binary outputs Function of quantity Static binary output trip Rated voltage 48 60 VDC 1...

Page 838: ...ying capacity Continuous 8 A 1 0 s 10 A Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitance of 0 2 μF 0 2 s 30 A 1 0 s 10 A Breaking capacity for DC with L R 40 ms 48 V 1 A 110 V 0 4 A 125 V 0 35 A 220 V 0 2 A 250 V 0 15 A Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated The activation ...

Page 839: ...ontacts and increase the disturbance immunity during normal protection trip times This is achieved with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady state current see figure 312 Inputs are debounced by software Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply ground faults see figure 311 The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering Alte...

Page 840: ...nary input 6 value BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7 value BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8 value OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning PID 4049 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 654 IOMOUT Input signals Name Type Default Description BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1 BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BO...

Page 841: ...Oscillation release limit 23 2 10 5 Monitored data PID 4050 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 656 IOMIN Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Binary input part of IOM module status PID 4049 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 657 IOMOUT Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 1 value BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binar...

Page 842: ...BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 5 status BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 6 value BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 6 force BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 6 status BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 7 value BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 7 force BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 7 status BO8...

Page 843: ...RCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 12 force BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 12 status 23 2 10 6 Technical data IP10636 1 v1 M12573 1 v9 Table 658 IOM Binary input output module Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs 8 DC voltage RL 24 30 V 48 60 V 125 V 220 250 V RL 20 RL 20 RL 20 RL 20 Power consumption 24 30 V 50 mA 48 60 V 50 mA 125 V 50 mA 220 250 V 50...

Page 844: ... A 110 125 V 0 4 A 48 60 V 0 2 A 24 30 V 0 1 A Breaking capacity for AC cos φ 0 4 250 V 8 0 A 250 V 8 0 A Breaking capacity for DC with L R 40 ms 48 V 1 A 110 V 0 4 A 125 V 0 35 A 220 V 0 2 A 250 V 0 15 A 48 V 1 A 110 V 0 4 A 125 V 0 35 A 220 V 0 2 A 250 V 0 15 A Maximum capacitive load 10 nF Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range After 6 m...

Page 845: ...0 V 0 1 A Breaking capacity for AC cos j 0 4 250 V 8 0 A 250 V 8 0 A Breaking capacity for DC with L R 40 ms 48 V 1 A 110 V 0 4 A 220 V 0 2 A 250 V 0 15 A 48 V 1 A 110 V 0 4 A 220 V 0 2 A 250 V 0 15 A Maximum capacitive load 10 nF Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated The activation time...

Page 846: ... A D converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency All inputs are calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non volatile memory on the module If mA inputs should report measurements dead band MaxReportT should be set to 0 s If MaxReportT is set to any value higher than 0 s all the inputs will have cyclic reporting completely disregard...

Page 847: ...M6380 35 v3 IEC99000504 V2 EN US Figure 320 MIM connection diagram 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 841 Technical manual ...

Page 848: ...e for channel 1 IMinCh1 25 00 25 00 mA 0 01 4 00 Min current of transducer for Channel 1 IMaxCh1 25 00 25 00 mA 0 01 20 00 Max current of transducer for Channel 1 ValueMinCh1 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 4 000 Min primary value corr to IMinCh1 ValueMaxCh1 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 20 000 Max primary value corr to IMaxCh1 EnDeadBandCh2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable amplitude...

Page 849: ...0 01 20 00 Max current of transducer for Channel 4 ValueMinCh4 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 4 000 Min primary value corr to IMinCh4 ValueMaxCh4 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 20 000 Max primary value corr to IMaxCh4 EnDeadBandCh5 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable amplitude deadband reporting for channel 5 DeadBandCh5 0 00 20 00 mA 0 01 1 00 Deadband amplitude for channel 5 IMinCh5 2...

Page 850: ...H2 REAL Analog input 2 CH3 REAL Analog input 3 CH4 REAL Analog input 4 CH5 REAL Analog input 5 CH6 REAL Analog input 6 CH1 REAL A Service value analog input 1 CH2 REAL A Service value analog input 2 CH3 REAL A Service value analog input 3 CH4 REAL A Service value analog input 4 CH5 REAL A Service value analog input 5 CH6 REAL A Service value analog input 6 23 2 11 6 Technical data SEMOD55438 1 v1 ...

Page 851: ...r and the rest are slaves No special control signal is needed in this case 23 2 12 2 Design SEMOD158668 1 v1 SEMOD158670 4 v3 RS485 is a PC MIP card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the Analog digital conversion module ADM RS485 connector pinouts SEMOD158670 10 v1 The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector figure 321 are presented in table 665 Table 665 The arrangement for...

Page 852: ...rew connector is used for the connection of IO ground It can be used in two combinations like Unconnected No ground of the IO part Soft grounded The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV 23 2 12 3 Technical data SEMOD158678 1 v1 SEMOD158710 2 v2 Table 666 Galvanic RS485 communication module Quantity Range or value Communication speed 2400 19200 bauds External connectors RS ...

Page 853: ...The Optical Ethernet module OEM is a PC MIP card and mounted as a mezzanine card on the numeric module NUM The OEM is a two channel 100BASE FXmodule IEC16000098 1 en vsdx 2 1 IEC16000098 V1 EN US Figure 322 OEM layout standard PMC MIP format 2 channels 1 Port 3061 2 Port 3062 23 2 13 4 Technical data IP16276 1 v1 GUID 4876834C CABB 400B B84B 215F65D8AF92 v2 Table 667 OEM Number of Ethernet ports O...

Page 854: ...PS output is available for time synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input The PPS output connector is of ST type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km 23 2 14 3 Monitored data PID 6200 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 668 SYNCHGPS Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description NoOfSatellites INTEGER Number of GPS signals from satellites 23 2 14 4 Technical data SEMOD55668...

Page 855: ...console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an antenna mast See figure 323 xx04000155 vsd 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 IEC04000155 V2 EN US Figure 323 Antenna with console where 1 GPS antenna 2 TNC connector 3 Console 2 6 7 x4 11 4 Mounting holes about 1 5 5 Tab for securing of antenna cable 6 Vertical mounting position 7 Horizontal mounting position 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hard...

Page 856: ...z Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm Lightning protection Must be provided externally Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end TNC in antenna end Accuracy 1μs 23 2 16 IRIG B time synchronization module IRIG B SEMOD141102 1 v1 23 2 16 1 Introduction SEMOD141113 4 v8 The IRIG B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the IED from a station clock The precision time protoco...

Page 857: ...signal input and lower left BNC connector for IRIG B signal input 23 2 16 3 Settings PID 5187 SETTINGS v5 Table 671 IRIG B Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SynchType BNC Opto Opto Type of synchronization TimeDomain LocalTime UTC LocalTime Time domain Encoding IRIG B 1344 1344TZ IRIG B Type of encoding TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ PlusTZ PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344...

Page 858: ...pp Amplitude modulated low level high level 1 3 Vpp 3 x low level max 9 Vpp Supported formats IRIG B 00x IRIG B 12x Accuracy 10μs for IRIG B 00x and 100μs for IRIG B 12x Input impedance 100 k ohm Optical connector Optical connector IRIG B Type ST Type of fibre 62 5 125 μm multimode fibre Supported formats IRIG B 00x Accuracy 1μs Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 852 Phasor measurement uni...

Page 859: ...Case with rear cover SEMOD53199 1 v1 M11985 110 v4 C B D E A IEC08000163 2 en vsd IEC08000163 V2 EN US Figure 325 Case with rear cover 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 853 Technical manual ...

Page 860: ... Case size inches A B C D E F G H J K 6U 1 2 x 19 10 47 8 81 9 53 10 07 8 10 7 50 8 02 18 31 9 00 19 00 6U 3 4 x 19 10 47 13 23 9 53 10 07 12 52 7 50 12 4 18 31 9 00 19 00 6U 1 1 x 19 10 47 17 65 9 53 10 07 16 86 7 50 16 86 18 31 9 00 19 00 The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 854 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical...

Page 861: ... cover SEMOD53195 1 v1 M2152 3 v5 C B D E A IEC08000164 3 en vsdx IEC08000164 V3 EN US Figure 328 Case without rear cover 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 855 Technical manual ...

Page 862: ... 6U 1 2 x 19 10 5 8 81 8 03 9 83 8 10 7 50 8 03 9 53 7 43 10 20 6U 3 4 x 19 10 5 13 23 8 03 9 83 12 51 7 50 12 44 13 95 7 43 14 61 6U 1 1 x 19 10 5 17 64 8 03 9 83 16 93 7 50 16 86 18 37 7 43 19 03 The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 856 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 863: ...rance Cut out dimensions inches A 0 04 B 0 04 C D 6U 1 2 x 19 8 27 10 01 0 16 0 39 0 53 6U 3 4 x 19 12 69 10 01 0 16 0 39 0 53 6U 1 1 x 19 17 11 10 01 0 16 0 39 0 53 E 7 52 without rear protection cover 9 12 with rear protection cover 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 857 Technical manual ...

Page 864: ...182 V2 EN US Figure 331 A 1 2 x 19 size IED side by side with RHGS6 xx05000505 vsd B A C G D E F IEC05000505 V1 EN US Figure 332 Panel cut out dimensions for side by side flush mounting Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 858 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 865: ... 10 21 18 31 7 50 1 35 0 52 0 25 diam 23 3 5 Wall mounting dimensions M11569 3 v4 IEC04000471 2 en vsd IEC04000471 V2 EN US Figure 333 Wall mounting Case size inches A B C D E 6U 1 2 x 19 10 50 10 52 10 74 15 36 9 57 6U 3 4 x 19 15 92 14 94 10 74 15 36 9 57 6U 1 1 x 19 20 31 19 33 10 74 15 36 9 57 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 859 Technical manu...

Page 866: ... IP54 protection The screws from the IED shall be used to fasten the fasteners to the IED Flush mounting cannot be used for side by side mounted IEDs when IP54 class must be fulfilled Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side by side in one 1 cut out To obtain IP54 class protection an additional factory mounted sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED Section 23 1MRK 511 40...

Page 867: ...5 Joining point of sealing strip 6 Panel 23 4 2 19 panel rack mounting IP10313 1 v1 23 4 2 1 Overview SEMOD127656 5 v4 All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using a suitably sized mounting kit consisting of two mounting angles their fastening screws and washers The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1 2 x 19 or 3 4 x 19 either to the left or t...

Page 868: ...be selected so that the total size equals 19 Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and the angles on the IED Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs inside the IED Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 862 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 869: ... M11948 2 v6 1a IEC08000160 3 en vsdx 1a 2 3 IEC08000160 V3 EN US Figure 335 19 panel rack mounting details The required torque for the screws is 3 5 Nm 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 863 Technical manual ...

Page 870: ...s also possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and the angles on the IED Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs inside the IED If fiber cables are bent too much the signal can be weakened Wall mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication modules with fiber connection Section 23 1MRK 511 4...

Page 871: ...hing 4 2 Screw 8 M4x10 3 Screw 4 M6x12 or corresponding 4 Mounting bar 2 5 Screw 6 M5x8 6 Side plate 2 23 4 3 3 How to reach the rear side of the IED M11941 2 v5 The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with this type of mounting See figure 337 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 865 Technical manual ...

Page 872: ...3 1 v1 23 4 4 1 Overview M11974 3 v3 IED case size 1 2 x 19 or 3 4 x 19 and RHGS cases can be mounted side by side up to a maximum size of 19 For side by side rack mounting the side by side mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used The mounting kit has to be ordered separately Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and the angles on t...

Page 873: ...16 M4x6 4 Mounting angle 2 5 Washer 16 M4x6 23 4 4 3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case M11953 3 v4 A 1 2 x 19 or 3 4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS case 6 or 12 depending on IED size The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24 It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of for example a DC switch or two auxiliary relays 1MRK 511 408 UUS A S...

Page 874: ...ting the side by side mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used The mounting kit has to be ordered separately The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19 With side by side flush mounting installation only IP class 20 is obtained To reach IP class 54 it is required to mount the IEDs separately For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs see section Flush mounting Us...

Page 875: ...12730 6 v4 1 2 3 4 IEC06000181 2 en vsd IEC06000181 V2 EN US Figure 340 Side by side flush mounting details RHGS6 side by side with 1 2 x 19 IED The required torque for the screws is 3 5 Nm PosNo Description Quantity Type 1 Mounting plate 2 2 3 Screw washer 16 M4x6 4 Mounting angle 2 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 23 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 869 Technical manual ...

Page 876: ...P10 with ring lug terminals M11777 1 v5 Table 675 Weight Case size Weight 6U 1 2 x 19 6U 3 4 x 19 33 lb 6U 1 1 x 19 40 lb 23 5 2 Electrical safety GUID 2825B541 DD31 4DAF B5B3 97555F81A1C2 v1 GUID 1CF5B10A CF8B 407D 8D87 F4B48B43C2B2 v1 Table 676 Electrical safety according to IEC 60255 27 Equipment class I protective earthed Overvoltage category III Pollution degree 2 normally only non conductive...

Page 877: ... 2 x AWG18 Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 300 V AC 3 mm2 AWG14 Because of limitations of space when ring lug terminal is ordered for Binary I O connections one blank slot is necessary between two adjacent IO modules Please refer to the ordering particulars for details 23 5 4 Influencing factors SEMOD52785 1 v1 M16705 1 v12 Table 679 Temperature and humidity influence Parameter Ref...

Page 878: ...ng to standard IP16288 1 v1 M16706 1 v9 Table 682 Electromagnetic compatibility Test Type test values Reference standards 1 MHz Oscillatory burst disturbance 2 5 kV IEC 60255 26 100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave immunity test 2 5 kV IEC 61000 4 18 Class III Ring wave immunity test 100 kHz 2 4 kV IEC 61000 4 12 Class IV Surge withstand capability test 2 5 kV oscillatory 4 0 kV fast transient IEE...

Page 879: ...CC Conducted emission 0 15 30 MHz IEC 60255 26 Table 683 Insulation Test Type test values Reference standard Dielectric test 2 0 kV AC 1 min SFP galvanic RJ45 1 0 kV 1 min IEC 60255 27 ANSI C37 90 IEEE 802 3 2015 Environment A Impulse voltage test 5 kV 1 2 50 ms 0 5 J Insulation resistance 100 MW at 500 VDC Table 684 Environmental tests Test Type test value Reference standard Cold operation test T...

Page 880: ...erence standards Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255 21 1 Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255 21 1 Shock response test Class I IEC 60255 21 2 Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255 21 2 Bump test Class I IEC 60255 21 2 Seismic test Class II IEC 60255 21 3 Section 23 1MRK 511 408 UUS A IED hardware 874 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 881: ...ering code 2 Power supply module PSM 3 mA input module MIM 4 Ordering and serial number 5 Manufacturer 6 Transformer designations 7 Transformer input module rated currents and voltages 8 Optional customer specific information 9 Order number dc supply voltage and rated frequency 10 Product type description and serial number 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 24 Labels Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANS...

Page 882: ...C06000573 V2 EN US 1 Warning label 2 Caution label 3 Class 1 laser product label It is used when an optical SFP or an MR LR LDCM is configured in the product IEC06000575 V1 EN US Section 24 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Labels 876 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 883: ...age as part of the product delivery The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from http www abb com protection control Connection diagrams for Customized products Connection diagram 670 series 2 2 1MRK002802 AG 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 25 Connection diagrams Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 877 Technical manual ...

Page 884: ...878 ...

Page 885: ...pendent time characteristics are used Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections operating in series xx05000129_ansi vsd IPickup IPickup IPickup ANSI05000129 V1 EN US Figure 342 Three overcurrent protections operating in series en05000130 vsd Time Fault point position Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 1 IEC05000130 V1 EN US Figure 343 Definit...

Page 886: ...gin between the operation time of the protections This required time margin is dependent of following factors in a simple case with two protections in series Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset times of the protections Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections Assume we have the f...

Page 887: ... the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted The breaker time t2 t1 can differ between different faults The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active At time t3 the protection A1 is reset that is the timer is stopped...

Page 888: ...vailable Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs p A B C pr tr and cr Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value here internal signal pickupValue a timer according to the selected operating mode is started The component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current...

Page 889: ...characteristic the following can be seen æ ö æ ö ç ç ç è ø è ø P op i t B td C A td Pickupn EQUATION1642 V1 EN US Equation 88 where top is the operating time of the protection The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to equation 89 in addition to the constant time delay æ ö æ ö ç ç ç è ø è ø ò 0 P t i C dt A td Pickupn EQUATION1643 V1 EN US Equation 89 ...

Page 890: ...mber of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled that is when a trip is given and i j is the fault current at time j For inverse time operation the inverse time characteristic is selectable Both the IEC and ANSI IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time lag of operation see figure 346 S...

Page 891: ...lected setting value for time multiplier k In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics there are also two additional inverse curves available the RI curve and the RD curve The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI The curve is described by equation 91 æ ö ç ç ç ç è ø 0 339 0 235 td t s Pickupn i EQUATION1647 V1 EN US Equation 91 w...

Page 892: ...upn s B EQUATION1640 V1 EN US Equation 93 Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled There is the possibility to choose between three different reset time lags Instantaneous Reset IEC Reset ANSI Reset If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis If IEC reset is chosen the timer wi...

Page 893: ...ime settings are instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available instantaneous IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time If the current dependent type is used settings pr tr and cr must be given see equation 95 r pr t t s td i cr pickupn æ ö ç ç ç æ ö ç ç è è ø ø AN...

Page 894: ...measured Iset 0 10 td 3 00 1 5 x Iset I 20 x Iset ANSI IEEE C37 112 2 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 46 ANSI Moderately Inverse A 0 0515 B 0 1140 P 0 02 tr 4 85 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A 64 07 B 0 250 P 2 0 tr 30 ANSI Long Time Very Invers...

Page 895: ...EQUATION1655 V1 EN US I Imeasured Iset td 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001 CR 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 PR 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 Table 689 RI and RD type inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy RI type inverse characteri...

Page 896: ...0 x Iset ANSI IEEE C37 112 5 0 or 160 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 46 ANSI Moderately Inverse A 0 0515 B 0 1140 P 0 02 tr 4 85 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A 64 07 B 0 250 P 2 0 tr 30 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A 28 55 B 0 712 P 2 0 tr 13 46 ANSI Lo...

Page 897: ...erse A 120 P 1 0 Programmable characteristic Trip characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø P A t B td I C EQUATION1654 V1 EN US Reset characteristic PR TR t td I CR EQUATION1655 V1 EN US I Imeasured Iset td 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001 CR 0 1 10 0 in steps of...

Page 898: ...tection Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø 1 P A t B td I EQUATION1651 V1 EN US Reset characteristic 2 1 tr t td I EQUATION1652 V1 EN US I Imeasured Iset td 0 05 2 00 in steps of 0 01 ANSI IEEE C37 112 5 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086...

Page 899: ...easured Iset td 0 05 2 00 in steps of 0 01 IEC 60255 151 5 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater IEC Normal Inverse A 0 14 P 0 02 IEC Very inverse A 13 5 P 1 0 IEC Inverse A 0 14 P 0 02 IEC Extremely inverse A 80 0 P 2 0 IEC Short time inverse A 0 05 P 0 04 IEC Long time inverse A 120 P 1 0 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 893 Technical m...

Page 900: ... EN US td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Type C curve 3 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t td V VPickup VPickup EQUATION1663 V2 EN US td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable curve æ ö ç è ø P td A t D V VPickup B C VPickup EQUATION1664 V1 EN US td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 50 100 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 0 1 0 in steps of 0 1 D 0 000 60 000 in steps of 0 001 P 0 000 3 000 in...

Page 901: ...p V VPickup EQUATION1659 V1 EN US V Vmeasured td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable curve é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú æ ö ê ú ç ëè ø û P td A t D VPickup V B C VPickup EQUATION1660 V1 EN US V Vmeasured td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 50 100 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 0 1 0 in steps of 0 1 D 0 000 60 000 in steps of 0 001 P 0 000 3 000 in steps of 0 001 1MRK 511 408 UUS A ...

Page 902: ...S td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Type C curve 3 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t td V VPickup VPickup EQUATION1663 V2 EN US td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable curve æ ö ç è ø P td A t D V VPickup B C VPickup EQUATION1664 V1 EN US td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 50 100 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 0 1 0 in steps of 0 1 D 0 000 60 000 in steps of 0 001 P 0 000 3 000 in step...

Page 903: ...OD118114 4 v4 A070750 V2 EN US Figure 347 ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 897 Technical manual ...

Page 904: ...A070751 V2 EN US Figure 348 ANSI Very inverse time characteristics Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 898 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 905: ...A070752 V2 EN US Figure 349 ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 899 Technical manual ...

Page 906: ...A070753 V2 EN US Figure 350 ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 900 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 907: ...A070817 V2 EN US Figure 351 ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 901 Technical manual ...

Page 908: ...A070818 V2 EN US Figure 352 ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 902 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 909: ...A070819 V2 EN US Figure 353 ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 903 Technical manual ...

Page 910: ...A070820 V2 EN US Figure 354 IEC Normal inverse time characteristics Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 904 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 911: ...A070821 V2 EN US Figure 355 IEC Very inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 905 Technical manual ...

Page 912: ...A070822 V2 EN US Figure 356 IEC Inverse time characteristics Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 906 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 913: ...A070823 V2 EN US Figure 357 IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 907 Technical manual ...

Page 914: ...A070824 V2 EN US Figure 358 IEC Short time inverse time characteristics Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 908 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 915: ...A070825 V2 EN US Figure 359 IEC Long time inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 909 Technical manual ...

Page 916: ...A070826 V2 EN US Figure 360 RI type inverse time characteristics Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 910 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 917: ...A070827 V2 EN US Figure 361 RD type inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 911 Technical manual ...

Page 918: ... 4CBD 8247 C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN US Figure 362 Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 912 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 919: ... 4DC7 A84B 174544C09142 V1 EN US Figure 363 Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 913 Technical manual ...

Page 920: ... 47F2 AEF9 45FF148CB679 V1 EN US Figure 364 Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 914 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 921: ...40E6 9767 69C1536E3CBC V1 EN US Figure 365 Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Section 26 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI 915 Technical manual ...

Page 922: ...4D9A A7C0 E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN US Figure 366 Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection Section 26 1MRK 511 408 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 916 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 2 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 923: ... service data unit AWG American Wire Gauge standard BBP Busbar protection BFOC 2 5 Bayonet fibre optic connector BFP Breaker failure protection BI Binary input BIM Binary input module BOM Binary output module BOS Binary outputs status BR External bistable relay BS British Standards BSR Binary signal transfer function receiver blocks BST Binary signal transfer function transmit blocks C37 94 IEEE A...

Page 924: ...MTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE ANSI C37 111 1999 IEC 60255 24 Contra directional Way of transmitting G 703 over a balanced line Involves four twisted pairs two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals COT Cause of transmission CPU Central processing unit CR Carrier ...

Page 925: ...age network EIA Electronic Industries Association EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EMF Electromotive force EMI Electromagnetic interference EnFP End fault protection EPA Enhanced performance architecture ESD Electrostatic discharge F SMA Type of optical fibre connector FAN Fault number FCB Flow control bit Frame count bit FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech data and prot...

Page 926: ...man machine interface HSAR High speed autoreclosing HSR High availability Seamless Redundancy HV High voltage HVDC High voltage direct current IDBS Integrating deadband supervision IEC International Electrical Committee IEC 60044 6 IEC Standard Instrument transformers Part 6 Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance IEC 60870 5 103 Communication standard for protec...

Page 927: ...ntative of a type In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function IP 1 Internet protocol The network layer for the TCP IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks IP is a connectionless best effort packet switching protocol It provides packet routing fragmentation and reassembly through the data link layer 2 Ingression protection according to IEC...

Page 928: ...rcurrent protection OEM Optical Ethernet module OLTC On load tap changer OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start pick up OV Overvoltage Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition For example a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance ...

Page 929: ...n set computer RMS value Root mean square value RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point to point connections RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 RTC Real time clock RTU Remote terminal unit SA Substation Automation SBO Select before operate SC Switch or push button to close SCL Short circuit location SCS Station control system SCADA Supervision...

Page 930: ...t supervision TCP Transmission control protocol The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet TCP IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol The de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4 2BSD Unix TCP IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both network layer and transport layer protocols While TCP and IP specify two p...

Page 931: ... Time TAI by the addition of a whole number of leap seconds to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 UT1 thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth s orbit the rotational axis tilt 23 5 degrees but still showing the Earth s irregular rotation on which UT1 is based The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24 hour clock and uses the Gregorian calendar It is used for aeroplane and ship...

Page 932: ...926 ...

Page 933: ...927 ...

Page 934: ... AB Grid Automation Products 721 59 Västerås Sweden Phone 46 0 21 32 50 00 abb com protection control Copyright 2017 ABB All rights reserved Specifications subject to change without notice 1MRK 511 408 UUS ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for Relion RES670

Brand: TA Pages: 58

Brand: WattNode Pages: 57

Brand: Kanomax Pages: 31

Brand: Hach Pages: 196

Brand: Makita Pages: 2

Brand: Makita Pages: 16

Brand: jenway Pages: 50

Brand: jenway Pages: 62

Brand: Laserworld Pages: 4

Brand: Laserworld Pages: 4

Brand: Laserworld Pages: 4

Brand: LaserLiner Pages: 56

Brand: Lasermet Pages: 8

Brand: WalkLAB Pages: 16

Brand: janitza Pages: 85

PLUS 3631 Series

Brand: insize Pages: 1

Brand: Datakom Pages: 28

Brand: PASCO Pages: 4

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands